Home

High-performance Embedded Workshop V.4.00 USER`S MANUAL

1. Launch Slave HEW 236 2CENESAS 1 List of Menus 1 9 List of Window Menu Menu Menu Option Keyboard Shortcuts Toolbar Button Function Window Cascade Arrange all open windows so that they overlap Tile Horizontally Arrange all open windows horizontally Tile Vertically Arrange all open windows vertically Arrange Icons Line up all minimized windows Close All Close all open windows Virtual Desktop Manager Rename your configuration to desktop a more meaningful name Default 1 4 Switch desktop configurations 1 10 List of Help Menu Menu Menu Option Keyboard Shortcuts Toolbar Button Function Help Help Topic Opens the main High performance Embedded Workshop help window Technical Create Bug Create a High performance Support Report Embedded Workshop bug report Check Website Check for High performance For Updates Embedded Workshop product updates or service packs About High performance Embedded Launches the About High Workshop performance Embedded Workshop dialog box allowing the user to view the version of High performance Embedded Workshop Debugger Help Shows the help window of the debugger when the debugger is connected 237 2CENESAS 1 List of Menus 238 2CENESAS 2 1 Command Name 1 ADD FILE ASSERT AUTO COMPLETE BUILD BUILD ALL CACHE 2 CHANGE CONFIGURATION CHANGE PROJECT CHANGE SESSION CLOSE WORKSPACE DEFAULT OBJECT FORMAT
2. Round Denormalized number allower as a result Fosition independent code PIC Treat double as float Use try throw and catch of G JEnabledisable runtime type information Bit field s members are allocated fram the lower K Pack struct union and class 2 Specify the options common to all project files in Step 2 The specifiable items depend on the CPU selected in Step 1 To move to Step 3 click the Next gt button in Step 2 New Project 3 9 Setting the Contents of Files to be Generated ki What kind of initialization routine would vou like to create Humber of Pa streams 0 W Use Heap Memory Heap Size H400 Generate maint Function a Ic source file W LO Register Definition Files Generate Hardware Setup Function None Ha Met Finish Cancel 3 Specify the generation file in Step 3 148 CENESAS Use I O Library Use Heap Memory I O Register Definition Files Note 15 Using the Debugger Checking enables use of standard I O libraries Number of I O Streams Specifies the number of I O streams that can be used simultaneously Checking enables use of the heap area management function sbrk Heap Size Specifies the unit of the size of the heap area to be managed Generate main Function Selects generation of a model main function Generates a main function file Project name c cpp Checking generates an I O regis
3. Downloads the object program Unloads the object program 235 1 List of Menus 1 7 List of Setup Menu Menu Menu Option Keyboard Shortcuts Toolbar Button Function Setup Customize Customize the HEW application Options Sets option of the HEW application Configure fonts colors keywords and so on for the window Format Views Radix Hex 16 Sets radix to base Hex Decimal 10 Sets radix to base Decimal Oct g Sets radix to base Octal Bin 7 Sets radix to base Binary 1 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 1 8 List of Tools Menu Menu Menu Option Keyboard Shortcuts Toolbar Button Function Tools Administration Control the components Change Toolchain Version Change toolchain version Version Select Select a version control system Control Configure Setup the version control system Add File s Add files to Visual SourceSafe Get a read only copy of a file from Visual SourceSafe Remove File s Get File s Get a read only copy of a file from Visual SourceSafe Check Out File s Check out a writable copy of a file from Visual SourceSafe Check In File s Check in your edits to a file into Visual SourceSafe Status Of File s View the status of a file in Visual SourceSafe Opens the Difference window Launches an external debugger tool Launches a slave HEW Show Difference Launch External Debugger
4. Enter the file extensions of the files you would like to search into the In Files Types field If several extensions are specified be sure to separate them with a comma e g C H Enter the directory that contains the files to search into the Directory field Alternatively you may browse to the desired directory graphically if you click the Browse button If you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it then check the Search Sub Directories checkbox If you just want to search the single directory specified in Directory field then ensure that this checkbox is not checked If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match Case checkbox If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular Expressions checkbox See Reference 3 Regular Expressions for further information Click Find to begin the search Any matches found will be displayed in the Find In Files tab of the Output window To stop a Find In Files action once it is under way select the Edit Stop Find in Files menu option Once the Find In Files operation is complete you may jump to an instance of the search string by double clicking on the desired entry in the Output window Replacing Text Replacing text is similar to finding text as discussed in the previous section The difference is that when the text is found you have the option to re
5. The details will be specific to the debugging platform that you chose in the new project Additional information about the memory mapping can be viewed in the System Status view s Memory pane The Device Configuration area shows how the memory in the device s address space 157 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Note Due to page length limitations in some emulators the range addresses may not exactly match the entered addresses 3 Setting up the HEW debugger Normal operation of the HEW debugger means that your target and download modules will be automatically configured in the project generation process However in some cases it may be necessary for you to manually configure your debug session This is often the case when using old toolchains and project generators that do not support the latest HEW interfaces To check your debug session setup click on the Debug gt debug Setting menu item The Debug Settings dialog is displayed Debug Settings ea SimSessionSH 4 Target Options vee Tes SH 4derna Default Debug Format Elf Duwark Download Modules Offset Address Add CONFIGDIAY E PAO QOOUOU00 EID wart Joli laap Renee Up Eav Cancel From this dialog it is possible to choose the target default debug format and download modules The Options tab also gives access to command line batch files and connection and download module options To
6. array 0 Specifies an array C C Object value Specifies reference of a member with pointer C ig value Specifies reference of a global variable C C Class function short Specifies a member function C struct STR value Specifies a cast operation C C 3 Supporting duplicate labels In some languages for example in C overloaded functions a label may represent more than one address Just entering the label name is ambiguous so the HEW will display the Select Function dialog box to display overloaded functions and member functions Select Function Ei Select Function Hame Set Function Mame Counter All Function Select Function Set Function 2 Functions E Functions fo Functions Lancel Select overloaded functions or member functions in the Select Function dialog box Generally only one function can be selected at one time except for setting breakpoints as multiple functions can be selected This dialog box has three areas Select Function Name listbox Displays the same name functions or member functions and their detailed information Set Function Name list box Displays the function to be set and their detailed information Counter group edit box All Function Displays the number of same name functions or member functions Select Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Select Function Name list box Set Function Displays the number of functions displayed in the Set
7. me System phase To change the order of phases system custom in a build or build all operation l pA Select the phase to be moved and then click the Move Up and Move Down buttons to move the phase up and down respectively Click the OK button to set the new ordering To view the properties of a system phase l 2 3 Select the system phase that you would like to view Click the Modify button The Modify Phase dialog will be invoked The Command tab shows general information about the phase This may include copyright information enhancements bug fixes user notes and so on Select the Environment tab to view the environment settings of the phase Click the OK button to close the dialog To modify a custom phase l 2 42 Select the custom phase that you would like to modify Click the Modify button The Modify Phase dialog will be invoked with the Command tab selected 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features Command Environment Command texcluding parameters E ToolsSMyT ool exe p Browse hitial directory 3 CONFIGDIR p Browse Don t check for input filets existence before executing Read Output On Fly 3 Change the contents of Command and Initial directory as appropriate 4 Set the Don t check for input file s existence before executing checkbox if you don t want the HEW to abort the execution of the phase if any
8. 4 Click the OK button to remove the files from the project Remove Project Files ki Ed Project files a T EAE W workspaces H AdemoSH Eee lowly rc CAHE W workspaces H 4demosSH lowenc c CAHE W Workspaces H4dema sH Lert reselprg c CAHE Wa Workspace H 4demosSH sbrk c CAHE Workspace H4demo5H SH4demo c C SHEW WorkspaceSH4demo SH 9 Fenove Ail vectbl sre CAHE W w ork spaces H 4demosSH vhandler src CO WHE Workspaces H 4demosSH To remove selected files from a project using the Workspace window 1 Select the files that you want to remove in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Multiple files can be selected by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key 2 Press DEL The selected files will be removed 17 2CENESAS 2 Build basics 2 3 3 Excluding a project file from build A file in a project can be individually excluded from build on a configuration by configuration basis To exclude a project file from build 1 Right click on the file that you want excluded from build in the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select the Exclude Build lt file gt option where lt file gt is the name of the selected file from the pop up menu A red cross Fy will appear on the file s icon and the file will be excluded from build 2 3 4 Including a project file in build A file that has been excluded from build can be included again To include a project file in build 1 Right
9. Shift F2 Shift Ctr1 T F9 Ctrl1 F9 Ctrl B Toolbar Button ie i H A e SS E BB 2CENESAS Function Reverses the last editing operation Repeats the last undone editing operation Removes highlighted text and places it on the Windows clipboard Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Copies the contents of the Windows clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor Removes highlighted text it is not copied to the Windows clipboard Selects i e highlights the entire contents of the active window Find text in the current file Find text in multiple files Replace text in the current file Jumps to a line in a file Finds a matching brace Sets a bookmark at the current line or clears a bookmark at the current line Jumps to the next bookmark in the current file from the current line Jumps to the previous bookmark in the current file from the current line Clears all bookmarks in the current file Defines a template Inserts a template Sets or clears a software breakpoint at the line showing the address Enable or disable the current software breakpoint Set the status of editor columns Opens the Breakpoins dialog box Evaluates simple and complex expressions 1 List of Menus 1 3 List of View Menu Menu Menu Option Keyboard Shortcuts Toolbar Button Function View Differences Opens the Difference
10. This section describes how to use the placeholders a feature provided by several of the High performance Embedded Workshop components 4 1 What is a Placeholder A placeholder is a special string inserted into text which 1s replaced at some subsequent time for the actual value For example one of the HEW placeholders is FULLFILE which represents a file with a full path Suppose that you have an editor in c myedit myeditor exe which can accept the file to be edited as a parameter When invoking the editor for example you may want to open the file FILE1 c from the directory c files the following shortcut could be made c myedit myeditor exe c files FILE1 C However what happens if you want to open any file through this editor The problem is that the command above is specific to c files filel c What we want to be able to do is to tell the HEW to use the editor specified but to open the file that we have chosen at that time To do this you can substitute the specific name of the file for a general Placeholder c myedit myeditor exe S FULLFILE Now whenever the HEW launches the editor with a file 1t knows that it has to replace the FULLFILE placeholder with the file you have selected 4 2 Inserting a Placeholder To insert a placeholder select in any of the following operations Example 1 1 Place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder 2 Click the pla
11. W Generate build log Fath stwORKs POISE ORES PHAME Browse 3 8 Changing Toolchain Version If two or more versions of the same toolchain are registered in the HEW you can choose a version of the toolchain on the Change Toolchain Version dialog To invoke the dialog select the Tools gt Change Toolchain Version menu option Choose one of the versions from the Toolchain version drop down list and click the OK button to enforce your choice 49 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features Change Toolchain ersion Toolchain name Renesas SuperH RISC Current wersion 9 0 0 0 l Cancel CPU Family SuperH RISC engine Toolchain Renesas SuperH RISC engine Star Intematan Toolchain versior 3 0 1 a 3 0 0 0 EEF Toolchain build phases EURAIL Build phase OptLinker SH Assembler 00 01 SH C C Compiler 3 00 01 SH CtC Library Generator To show information about toolchain components select a tool from the Toolchain build phase list on the Change Toolchain Version dialog and click the Information button A tool information dialog will show you information about the tool Click the Close button to close the dialog 3 9 Generating a makefile The HEW allows you to generate a makefile which can be used to build parts of your workspace in the DOS Command Prompt without HEW This is particularly useful if you want to version control an entire build including the m
12. When a new toolbar is created it will appear undocked i e floating and empty To add buttons to a toolbar 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog will be displayed Select the Commands tab 2 Browse the available buttons by selecting the button categories from the Categories list Select a button from the Buttons area to display information on its operation 3 Click and drag a button from the dialog onto the toolbar 89 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment Command Categories Debug Bookmarks Select a category then click a button to see its description Drag the button to any toolbar To remove buttons from a toolbar 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog will be displayed Select the Commands tab 2 Click and drag a button from the toolbar onto the Buttons area To modify the name of a user defined toolbar 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog will be displayed 2 Inthe Toolbars list select the user defined toolbar and whose name you want to modify 3 Modify the name of the toolbar in the Toolbar Name field 4 Click the OK button to save the toolbar s new name To remove a user defined toolbar 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog will be displayed 2 Select the user defined toolbar from the Toolbars list
13. Session combo when synchronized debugging is switched on There are a number of capabilities that are synchronized when this facility is enabled The following tables display the capabilities when synchronized debugging is switched on The example shows what happens in the two synchronized sessions 210 CENESAS Debugging function User click GO in any Session User click STEP Into out over in any Session User click ESC in any Session RESET CPU in any Session Target Debugger Session 1 GO Step BREAK BREAK by breakpoints illegal access or due to illegal User Program Stop running Same Effect of pressing ESC RESET CPU 15 Using the Debugger Target Debugger Session 2 GO Step BREAK Stop running Same Effect of pressing ESC BREAK by breakpoints illegal access or due to illegal User Program RESET CPU The following tables display the capabilities when synchronized debugging is switched off The example shows what happens in the two synchronized sessions Debugging function User click GO in Session 1 User click GO in Session 2 User click STEP in session 1 User click STEP in session 2 User click ESC in session 1 User click ESC in session 2 RESET CPU in session 1 RESET CPU in session 2 Note Target Debugger Session 1 GO No activities GO manually executed by User
14. cccccccccccccceceeceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 175 15 3 3 S lcctmg a Memory RANGE sesnirearen a E ETENE TANNE EANTA 175 15 3 4 Filling an Area of Memory with Constant Data nnnnnnnnnnnnennneneserrrrsrrsrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrreen 176 15 3 5 Copying an Area of Memory ccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 176 15 3 6 Comparing the Memory Contents cccccccccccccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 177 153 7 Testing Ai Ara of Memory sisisncassnsactvnaccinasnaceianieeenanansadipnarstuataadeiadpesdsasenonnsadapuasiaaatsadiaaoeses 178 15 3 8 Saving Memory Contents in a Text File 00 ccccccccccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 178 1539 Findinga value im MEMOry sist secrete dessiemseseb a E TE EEE E ces 179 15 3 10 Changing the Display Address nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnereeeeereerereereresesererererrsrrerrssrrereeeen 179 15 3 11 Changing the Scroll Area cccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseesseseeeeess 180 15 3 12 Starting address to value of the reQister ec ccccccccccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 180 15 3 13 Tracking the stack pointer POSItiON ccccccccccccceccceccccccceeccceeecceceeececeeeeseeeceeesseeesseeeeeess 180 15 3 14 Changing the Program Display Position Immediately After Downloading 181 15 3 15 Updating the Window
15. menu option The Page Setup dialog will be invoked 2 Enter the width of the margins required into the Left Right Top and Bottom fields 3 Set the Inch or mm option accordingly 4 Click the OK button for the new settings to take effect Jw Wrap Text oaee 64 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor To set up the header and footer information 1 Select the File gt Page Setup menu option The Page Setup dialog will be invoked 2 Enter into the Header and Footer edit fields the text required to be displayed All normal placeholders are available along with page numbering text justification and date fields These are all expanded before the page is to be printed 3 Click the OK button for the new settings to take effect To set up print wrapping 1 Select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog will be invoked 2 Click the wrap text check box This switches on the wrap text facility when printing so no text is truncated and everything 1s visible 3 Click OK for the new settings to take effect 4 9 2 Changing Tabs When the TAB key is pressed in the editor a tab character 1s usually stored in the file However sometimes it is preferable to store spaces instead The representation of tab characters can be controlled via the Options dialog W Use spaces as tabs Tab size fl To change tab size 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog will be displayed Select t
16. was PO deb WQger Debugger settings PO debugger location P Browse PO profile file location P Browse Command line options PD Download module P Browse To configure the PD debugger to integrate with HEW l Firstly the location of the debugger executable must be specified This may have been configured by the installation program or a project generation utility The second item of data is the profile file This tells the debugger which profile file to load when it is launched This file stores the debug setup information The third item of data are the command line options This field allows additional options to be specified which can modify the behaviour of the external debugger Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the HEW to automatically switch to the debugger when the download module changes after a build 15 16 3 Configuring an external debugger to integrate with HEW The following details the information required to setup an external debugger which is not Hitachi Debugging Interface or the PD debugger to integrate with HEW and launch from the external debugger option in HEW 208 External debugger selected Other external debugger Debugger settings External debugger location P Browse Command line options PO Download module PD Browse CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger To configure an external debugger t
17. 15 12 6 Mu lnple Steps seenen aa a E EE NEE 202 15 13 Stopping VOUL propra si nssisicsincssinireine vanaiedussinstionsituhitediun tenisesine tahtiediuatdeseanasntuatdacaleatahdatnatdedeeuatentetea 202 15 13 1 Halting lt 6 XC CUNO 535 sersasanacscsasnaesassageasassaaaveassinssesn eLa EE ea E E a EE ea E 202 15 13 2 Standard PC breakpoints sssscsiissssrnsncinsanine aeaiia NENEN EKANA AEAEE KANEA NEKANE 203 15 14 SEUS WINGO oreina nE EEE EAE EE E E E E R EE ES 204 15 15 Viewing the function call histOry ccc cceeeeessessesssssesseeseseesseseeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeas 204 15 15 1 Opening the Stack Trace Window cccccccccccscccccceccececeeececeeeeeeeeeceeceseeeeeeeeseseeeeseeeeeess 204 15 15 2 Speciiyme te VIW sisri erii a nE eE e EERE TEETE iatna 205 15 15 3 Viewing the Source Program cccccsseeesssessssesseeeeseesesesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessaaaaaas 206 15 16 Using an external Ge BiG eis acieciesesencsvionndesvsascnciacesnacdvdanacciisaciteiencieionsedctsieeauessenvsieoioes 206 15 16 1 Configuring the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with HEW ssssseeseesneeneseen 207 15 16 2 Configuring the PD debugger to integrate With HEW cc cccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 207 15 16 3 Configuring an external debugger to integrate with HEW u cc cccccccesecceeeeeeeeeees 208 15 17 Synchronizing multiple debugging platfOrms cc cccccccecseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
18. Access size Note Support for this function depends on the debugging platform Cancel 184 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 4 Displaying memory contents as an image The memory contents can be displayed as an image in the Image View window 15 4 1 Opening the Image View Window Click the Image toolbar button Lt or choose View gt Graphic gt Image to open the Image Properties dialog box Image Properties my La eb Set al hee Se AIF ita OOOU0000 Sebel hese m U si relate Witte Pe astar tf Foe bion MG tY Hele Slee veel Wil thre ere HEIER The Image Properties dialog box is used to specify the display method of the Image View window 185 RENESAS 15 Using the Debugger The following items are to be specified Color Information Buffer Information View Information 186 Specifies the color information of the image to be displayed Mode Bit Pixel Sampling Format Specifies the format MONOCHROME Displays in black and white RGB Displayed in R red G green and B blue BGR Displayed in B blue G green and R red YCbCr Displayed by Y brightness Cb color difference in blue and Cr color difference in red Specifies Bit Pixel according to the selected Mode Valid when RGB or BGR is selected Specifies the format of sampling Valid when YCbCr is selected Specifies Chunky planar Valid
19. Both a start and end address should be supplied Clicking OK on this dialog then passes the print selection to the standard print formatting and selection dialog From here you can choose your printer and page setup options 15 3 Operating memory This section describes how to look at memory areas in the CPU s address space How to look at a memory area in different formats how to fill and move a memory block and how to load and verify a memory area with a disk file are described 172 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 3 1 Viewing a Memory Area The Memory Window displays the contents of contiguous memory To open the Memory view click the Memory toolbar button or select the View gt CPU gt Memory menu option You can specify the display start address and the scroll range at opening The Display Address dialog box is opened Specify the Display Address Scroll Start Address and Scroll End Address Display Address ea Display Address ooonoo0d a Scroll Start Address ooooo0n0 a Scroll End Address FFFFFFFF al Cancel Click the OK button or press the Enter key and the dialog box closes and the Memory window opens The display can be scrolled within the range of the entered display scroll start and end addresses Configuration of Memory window Toobar Far m ss fis 10 40 amp 2 ahdga a 26 a2 fl aammnne e olum _ address Labell Register 40 1 42 9 4 5 7 i F
20. Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking the OK button Add Menu Option T Commands Cancel Add Modit Hemose Addad Mave up Mare dawr 109 CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System To modify a user defined version control menu option 1 Select the Tools Version Control Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be modified from the User menu options list and then click the Modify button The Modify Menu Option dialog will be displayed Modify the commands as necessary and then click OK button 4 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking the OK button To remove a user defined version control menu option 1 Select the Tools Version Control Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be removed from the User menu options list and click the Remove button 3 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking the OK button To change the ordering of user defined version control menu options 1 Select the Tools Version Control Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed 2 Select the menu option to be moved and then click the Move up and Move down buttons as necessary 3 Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking the OK button 8
21. ERASE EVALUATE FILE LOAD FILE SAVE FILE UNLOAD FILE VERIFY 2 GENERATE MAKE FILE GO GO RESET GO TILL HALT HELP INITIALIZE LOG MEMORY COMPARE 2 MEMORY DISPLAY MEMORY EDIT MEMORY FILL MEMORY FIND 12 MEMORY MOVE MEMORY TEST 2 OPEN WORKSPACE QUIT RADIX REMOVE FILE RESET SAVE SESSION SAVE WORKSPACE SLEEP STEP STEP MODE STEP OUT STEP OVER STEP RATE SUBMIT 2 List of Commands 2 List of Commands Short Name AF AC BU BL CO CP CS CW DO ER EV FL FS FU FV GM GO GR GT HA HE LO MC MD ME MF MI MV MT OW QU REM SE SW ST SM SP SO SR SU Command List Alphabetically Order Contents Comment Adds a file to the current project Checks if an expression is true or false Switches the auto completion Performs a build on the current project Performs a build all on the current project Sets caching on or off Sets the configuration to the specified configuration name Sets the specified project file as the current project Sets the specified session as the current session Closes a workspace Sets the object format to be used by default Clears the Command Line window Evaluates an expression Loads an object program file Saves memory to a file Unloads an object file from memory Verifies file contents against memory Generates a build makefile for the current workspace Runs program Runs program from reset Runs program until specified addresses Hal
22. Select Copy from the pop up menu Press CTRL C Click the Paste toolbar button Fel Select Edit Paste Select Paste from the pop up menu Press CTRL V Select Edit Clear Press Delete Select Edit Select All Press CTRL A 59 4 Using the Editor 4 6 Searching and Navigating through Files 4 6 1 Finding Text To search for text in the current file l 2 3 4 6 2 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to search is the active window Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search Select one of the following operations to display the Find dialog Click the Find toolbar button i OR Press CTRL F OR Select the Edit Find menu option OR Select the Find option from the Editor window s pop up menu Find lied Find what T Match whole word only Cancel Match case Regular expression Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find What field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find What field If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then click the Match Whole Word Only checkbox When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string If you would like your search to be case sensitive 1 e to distinguish between up
23. Used to indicate text that must be entered excluding the quotes Key Key Used to indicate required key presses For example CTRL N means press the CTRL key and then whilst holding the CTRL key down press the N key Trademarks Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Visual SourceSafe is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation IBM and AT are registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation All brand or product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations 2CENESAS 2CENESAS Table Of Contents Table Of Contents OON ae css E E wp sos ce on eas E E E E 1 1 1 Workspaces projects and files nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenssensssseesssereeseeseeseeerererererererrerererrrerrrerrrererererereeens 1 1 2 Main WIC W ws ecstisccnaeniaidvortidemantintiacibeetedsninsteaadbdnthaesiadthoeaidalosad deans bindaactoatteawsbeeTaaguens dramibdedaemacwiasiin 1 1 2 1 RIN a ier ee EE EE EEA N E A OE A E E utes canauts AA E ATE A O T 2 1 2 2 Meni Dal sesei s anae E EEr A EEE EEE 2 1 2 3 Toolbars acohsestaecies Seateiiaepadousas denentieseAcniadsabeiiansudeuiae sured oaepetartansbetebdesodeds ined taasiagcoensaadoaesmeoeaentaeses 2 1 2 4 OTIS VIC WOW as cscrscrrsc scl dencsecsSacatvcs oceans cornice dence ocatotionteeaaccaeciesheesaaeateeseacenseseaeasacanceeineste 5 1 2 5 Editor window ssessseeseeeeeess
24. dialog Once a version control tool is selected you will notice that the Version Control gt Configure option has now become available 106 CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System 8 Using the Custom Version Control System The custom version control system is a configurable addition to the High performance Embedded Workshop which allows you to connect to a version control system that is already installed on your machine To clarify further the High performance Embedded Workshop does not provide a version control tool itself only a means for you to integrate the version control system that you use into your workspaces and projects 8 1 Defining Version Control Menu Options The custom version control system allows you to invoke a version control command either by selecting an option from the Tools Version Control sub menu or by clicking a version control toolbar button When either of these actions are performed the associated commands are executed and the output is displayed in the Version Control tab of the Output window To execute a version control menu option or toolbar button 1 Select the items to which you want to apply the version control command from the Workspace window This may include a workspace project s folder s and file s When the command is selected all of the files will be extracted from the selected items and passed in turn to the version control command For example if y
25. e Expanding the I O register bit display e If the I O register bit value is changed the value is displayed in red e Double clicking the I O register bit display line opens a dialog which allows you to change a register value e The I O register bit contents line can be changed by in place editing Option Clicking the right hand mouse button displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Toolbar bottom Function Load IO File Manually load an IO file Print Prints the contents currently displayed in the window Save To File m Saves the contents currently displayed in the window in a text file Toolbar display Showing hiding toolbar buttons Customize toolbar Customizing toolbar buttons 15 6 2 Expanding an I O register display To display the names addresses and values of the I O registers double click on the module name or select the module name by clicking on it or using the cursor keys and press the cursor right key The module display will expand to show the individual registers of that peripheral module and their names addresses and values Double clicking or pressing the cursor left key again on the module name will close the I O register display Note If you are using an emulator based
26. if you were to select an assembly source file from the workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File you would expect the file to be assembled The connection between file group and which phase s to execute is managed by the Build File Order tab of the Build Phases dialog The list displays all of the current phases that will be executed when the build file operation is selected upon the file group shown in the File group list box In figure below the C source file file group is selected and the Compiler and MyPhase phases are associated with it Entries in the Phase order list of the Build File Order tab are added automatically as new entries are added to the Build Order tab Build Order Build File Order File Mappines File group Phage order MISH OG Compiler My Phase is source Tile Linkage symbol file For example if you were to add a phase which takes C source files as input then this phase will be automatically added to the list of phases to execute when a build file operation is applied to a C source file If you don t want a certain phase to execute when Build gt Build File is selected then clear the check box to the left of the phase name in the Phase order list 3 4 Setting custom build phase options Once you have defined a custom phase you will want to specify the command line options that should be used when it is executed Each defined phase has a me
27. in decimal Y Position Specifies the Y axis of the start location When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Specifies the height and width of the image to be displayed partly Width Displays the width of display When a prefix is Pixel omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Height Displays the height of display When a prefix is Pixel omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal After the settings have been made in the Image Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Image View window Even after the Image View window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the pop up menu Displays the memory contents as an image Image Option Clicking the right hand mouse button displays a pop up menu containing available options Pop up menu options Function Auto Refresh Nonrefresh Not refresh the window contents Stop Automatically update the window contents when user program execution stops Real time Real time updated the window contents Refresh Now Updates the window contents Properties Displays information on the pixel on which the mouse pointer is located 15 4 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents Checking Auto Refresh gt Not Refresh in the pop up menu will not refresh the window Checking Auto Refresh gt S
28. lt lt c oc dirl filel obj c dirl filel c La If the sub command file generated has the name c temp hmk111 cmd then the following would be executed by hmake assuming c dir1 file1 obj is out of date gcc c temp hmk111 cmd The command file c temp hmk111 cmd would contain c o c dirl filel obj c dir1 filel c It is possible to include more than one command in the description block and to use combinations of the standard and sub command file commands 265 2CENESAS 12 HMAKE User Guide 12 4 Comments A character signifies a comment When this character appears as the first character on a line the rest of the line up until the next new line character is ignored There follows examples of valid comments My hmake file Variable declaration OUTPUT c dir1 filel obj Descriptor OUTPUT c dirl filel c c dir1 file1 h set VARI valuel gcc c dirl filel c A comment must occupy its own line in the hmake file It is not possible to put comments on the end of other statements 12 5 Message commands The message command is used to output a line of text to standard out whilst a make file is executing These text lines will be output in the order they appear in the make file in amongst output from any executables being executed as appropriate No buffering of output text will take place A message command has the following syntax IMESSAGE lt text to output gt A new line cha
29. menu option The Insert Project dialog box will be displayed Select the New project radio button Click the OK button The Insert New Project dialog box will be invoked Enter the name of the new workspace into the Project Name field This can be up to 32 characters in length and contain letters numbers and the underscore character Especially do not use a minus sign or a space As you enter the project name the HEW will add a sub directory for you automatically This can be deleted if desired Use the Browse button to graphically select the directory in which you would like to create the project Alternatively you can type the directory into the Directory field manually The project type list displays all of the available project types e g Application Library etc Select the type of project that you want to create from this list Click the OK button to create the project and insert it into the workspace To insert an existing project into a workspace 32 f Existing project PO Browse Select the Project gt Insert Project menu option The Insert Project dialog box will be displayed Select the Existing project radio button Enter the full path of the project database file HWP file into the edit field or click the Browse button to search for it graphically Click the OK button to insert the existing project into the workspace 2CENESAS 2 Build basics 2 11 Setting
30. 1 e the phase that generates the files from the Source phase drop down list 3 Select the destination phase 1 e the phase that takes these files from the Destination phase drop down list 4 Click the OK button to create the new mapping Define File Mapping aa Object file a SOUrCe phase ne Cancel SH Gecembler Destination phase OptLinker 2CENESAS 47 3 Advanced build features To modify a file mapping 1 Select the mapping to be modified 2 Click the Modify button The Define File Mapping dialog will be invoked 3 Modify the options as necessary 4 Click the OK button to commit the changes To remove a file mapping 1 Select the mapping to be removed 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the OK button to commit the changes 3 6 Controlling the build By default the High performance Embedded Workshop will execute all of the phases in a build and only stop if a fatal error 1s encountered You can change this behavior by setting the controls on the Build tab of the Options dialog Errors and warnings Stop build if the number of errors exceeds U W Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds 10 Select the Setup gt Options menu option to display the Options and then select the Build tab If you want to stop the build when a certain number of errors are exceeded then set the Stop build if the no of errors exceeds checkbox and specify the error c
31. 2 Adding a new build configuration ccccccceseseeesessseeseeseeeessessessseaasaesassaasaaaasessaaaasaaaaaas 23 2 6 3 Removing a build configuration ccccceeeeseessesseseseeeeseesessessesssssesssessssssssssssasaaasseaagaaas 25 21 Duilding 90 Cs sweeps anemapasinncrincoa geen ae aa eea aE ae aa ara E Eao AEE EEEE ANN Ainnir 26 i Table Of Contents 2 7 1 Building individual files ccccccccccccesssssnceeeeeeeseessneeeeeceessessseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseesniaeeeeeeeeeegs 26 22 Building a project wpa todtiveve cree cot necncosaupehenna dose out enekephaawseebsaupehenne testi tamemseephancectsaunsbenneteceroeaetoees 26 2 OPDE IE ee e e Tae Zi 2 7 4 Building multiple projects cc ccccccscsceccccccccccceceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeess 21 2 7 5 The Output WindoW nnnnunussssssrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrreseseeeeeeseseseeeesesereeeeeeens 28 2 10 Controlling the content of the output window cccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 28 Zap Displaying out of date files in the workspace window scsssesssesseeesesssssssssssttsstseeeeas 28 28 BAUM GCC TCI CICS sesississsesi nisust eee a eaea aaa Eaa a 29 2 9 Configuring the Workspace window cccccccccccccccccececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 2 10 Inserting a project into the workspace cece cccccceeeeeeseeeeeeee
32. 2 Defining Version Control Commands Version control commands are listed in the Define Commands dialog You can define as many commands as you want to and specify the order in which they execute Existing commands can be modified or removed To define a new version control command 1 Click the Add button on the Define Commands dialog The Add Command dialog will be invoked Add Command Ei Command Version control executable vies WINNT Ss exe Browse Cancel Arguments History SCV DIR FILENAME YRtUSERNAME P gt Initial directory SFILEDIR3 gt Browse Executable return code Retum code of executable is not meaningful C Command has failed if the return code is Not Equal To fo 110 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System 2 Enter the full path of the command into the Version Control Executable field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button Enter the arguments for the command into the Arguments field 4 Enter into Initial directory the directory from which you would like to run the executable or browse to it graphically by clicking Browse In most cases this should be set to the FILEDIR placeholder which means that the command should be executed from the same directory as the file 5 Set the Executable return code options as appropriate see below 6 Click the OK button to define the new comman
33. 8 COON ain ne eee ne ee eee E 67 421 Syntax COl DE ee ev nr er ner en ener 67 4 12 2 Changing text colors cccccccccccccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseesessseeseeeeees 67 4 123 Creating new Keywords acts iiec cd etas cincctcinnnacetzsncectaas eri aE EEEN aE ENTANS 68 4 12 4 Enabling disabling syntax coloring ccc cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeesesseeeseeeeess 69 lk TE 2 en EE EEA A AE EEEE EAE 70 AL Dehni a Acs 00 0 2 cen ee E E T ee E ee eee 70 Pea es 1 0 22g Templates T T a eee Tia 71 415 3 Inserting a Template ices ciccdccsnsacasesasicedsosasncaeesatuetecsnstnsncenn sete sesasnestanisescontieasenadyisaonaaeaenvadnioasdnads 71 EN Brace Mathini cca cece to ccc cece eet an steve po EEE TZ AAS Editor Column Mana GEMS Il orsica eie EE EAEE 72 Ato Toolin Wie ieseni E nee ne nn ee nee ene nen een ee ee ene nee ee eer er 73 4 17 Smart edit capability in the HEW CQO vs dcccccsecei ai ccmsnenegunaciaudnsdenaievasiedveedersianadicedeeseuaieeaieenss 74 ANS Tey AMAL an EXPres iOfieurersro ieran ea E EEE ANE EEEE EE AE A EE EE 75 Tools Administration oy sssuss ouceranaanesserandanks auinnehadevassaaamonoaigiendss bastnanhidiaseneseuanaswoundsebdaeianahedevennaanwnessbudenss 77 5 1 OUT QC AGIOS assise TE T eT 78 52 HEW Registration Files HRF J cccsssnsessstenacsivansatsnatanadaseaunatsedannaisieanadsaaawsncumsdsedeaoeaatacannesaeanases 78 5 3 Registenne a C ONIDOMCIL sesir
34. ASIC device mapped into the microcomputer s address space File format Each module name must be defined in the Modules definition section and the numbering of each module must be sequential Each module corresponds to a register definition section and within the section each entry defines an I O register The BaseAddress definition is for devices where the location of I O registers moves in the address space depending on the CPU mode In this case the BaseAddress value is the base address of the I O registers in one specific mode and the addresses used in the register definitions are the address locations of the registers in the same mode When the I O register file is actually used the BaseAddress value is subtracted from the defined register address and the resultant offset added to the relevant base address for the selected mode Each module has a section that defines the registers forming it along with an optional dependency the dependency is checked to see if the module is enabled or not Each register name must be defined in the section and the numbering of each register must be sequential The dependency is entered in the section as dep lt reg gt lt bit gt lt value gt 1 lt reg gt is the register id of the dependency 2 lt bit gt is the bit position within the register 3 lt value gt is the value that the bit must be for the module to be enabled The Register definition entry is entered in the format id lt na
35. Add button which is adjacent to the list you require 3 The Add New Placeholder dialog is displayed 4 Inthe fields provided choose a suitable name for the placeholder and a description of what the placeholder means 5 Choose a directory which relates to this placeholder It is possible to use placeholders that are already defined in this field such as PROJDIR Note In HEW2 1 or later version the user defined directory can be set as the custom placeholder which can be used for setting the toolchain option When the directory path is specified specify an absolute path in Directory as shown in figure below 93 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment Hew Custom Placeholder Ei E3 Placeholder K USE RDIR Cancel Description User define directory Directory CAUser Sre Browse 6 4 Using the workspace and project log facilities The HEW has workspace and project logging facilities integrated into the application These facilities can be switched on via the log tab on the Tools customize dialog This option is especially useful when the network database is in operation This is because user names and changes are logged to this file Log I Generate build log Path stwORKS POIR EH ORES PAAME J bet Browse I Generate workspace log lM Generate log for projects When the Generate workspace log is clicked any workspace changes will be logged to a file with the same na
36. Conitents ccccccseessssssssssessessssssessesesesseeeseeseeeeeseseeseeeagags 181 15 3 16 Disabling Update of the Window Contents ccccccesssssessessessssesssssssssssssssssesseeaaaes 181 15 3 17 Changing the Data Length 0 cccccccssccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 181 15 3 18 Chancing the RadiX seres E E EE EEEN 181 15 3 19 Chanoine he COJE reisir spaces prn nran E R E RE RE 182 15 3 20 Seting the Br 6 0 ee ee ee eee eee eee ree EREA Rinia 182 yi Table Of Contents 15 3 21 Changing the number of digits displayed 0 0 cccccccccccccscceccceecececceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 182 15 3 22 Switching display or non display of Measurement result ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 183 15 3 23 SAVIN AM arca Of MNCMIOLY eissii ekinini anei n TIE RE TOE e E aonana ninia 183 15 3 24 Loading a Memory Area from a File oo ccecccccecceccccccecccecccecceceeeeeceeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeess 184 15 3 25 Splitting Up the Window Display ccccccccccccccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 184 15 3 26 NW Gilby eG Momory Aeir reinii ineei EEEN EET E 184 15 4 Displaying memory contents as an 1MAE eesesseseeeeesseeeeerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrreerererreresesrrerrrrrrreresees 185 15 4 1 Opening the Image View Window ccccccccccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 185 15 4 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents ccccccccc
37. Customize Toolbar dialog This is shown below 259 CENESAS 10 Integrated Toolbars in a Components View Customize Toolbar Ovallable toolbar buttons Current toolbar buttona PL Compare files Gel lenore white space da F ind Cancel a ie F nd HEA DOCU ENEE of search text rE Find previous occurrence of searc Find previous difference a Find next difference Howe Up Move Down This dialog allows you to modify the displayed buttons and change the ordering The list on the left named Available toolbar buttons displays all toolbar buttons not currently in use on the toolbar The list named Current toolbar buttons displays all of the toolbars currently added to the components toolbar eparator Hdd gt 4 Remove To add the currently selected buttons to a toolbar 1 Select the toolbar button you wish to add from the Available toolbar buttons list 2 Press the Add button The toolbar is added to the bottom of the list 3 Click OK To move the currently selected buttons 1 Select the toolbar you wish to move in the Current toolbar buttons list 2 Click Move up or Move down until it is in the desired position 3 Click OK To remove the currently selected buttons from a toolbar 1 Select the toolbar button you wish to remove from the Current toolbar buttons list 2 Press the Remove button The toolbar is added to the Available toolbar buttons list 3 Click OK 260 2CEN
38. Dependencies Stop Build Terminate Current Tool Build Phase Build Configurations Linkage Order Generate Makefile Keyboard Shortcuts Ctrl Break Available only when there is a toolchain installed 234 2CENESAS Toolbar Button Function Sets options for a build phase Build the selected files Build out of date project files Build project files regardless of whether the project files are out o date Build multiple projects Update a project s dependencies Stop a build Forcibly terminate a task Add remove and modify phase Select the current configuration Customize the HEW linkage order Generate a makefile 1 6 List of Debug Menu Menu Debug Menu Option Debug Sessions Debug Settings Reset CPU Go Reset Go Go to Cursor Set PC to Cursor Run Display PC Step In Step Over Step Out Step Step Auto Mode Assembly Source Halt Program Initialize Connect Disconnect aa Save Memory Verify Memory 1 Download Modules Unload Modules Keyboard Shortcuts F5 Shift F5 Ctrl Shift Y F11 F10 Shift F11 Toolbar Button Bij Bi Bj FC 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 2CENESAS 1 List of Menus Function Opens the Debug Sessions dialog box to list add or remove the debug session Opens the Debug Settings dialog box to set the debugging conditions or dow
39. E E S Optimize OF Optimize OHF Optimize ON C Source Files Lit File TES Lit File WO Liat File HO Y Debug OFF Debug ON Debug OHF Pu Liat File YES Liat File HO Liat File HO Assembler Source Files Coty Prope cti Defaut Coty Proe ctir Debug Cah Prope cti hh Opti zed 24 2CENESAS 2 Build basics 2 6 1 Selecting a build configuration To select the current configuration Debug 1 Select the Build gt Build Configurations menu option to display the Build Configurations dialog 2 Select the build configuration that you want to use from the Current Configuration drop down list 3 Click the OK button to select the configuration You can also select a different build configuration by selecting it from the Current Configuration drop down list box on the Standard toolbar 2 6 2 Adding a new build configuration To add a new build configuration 1 Select the Build gt Build Configurations menu option to display the Build Configurations dialog 2 Click the Add button The Add Configuration dialog will be invoked Enter the new build configuration name into the Configuration name field As you enter the new build configuration name the directory underneath changes to reflect the configuration directory that will be used Select one of the existing build configurations on which you want to base the new build configuration from the Based on configuration drop down lis
40. FFFFEFFF RAM FFFFFEOQO FFFFFFFF I 0 aystem Memory Resources OO000000 OO0007FFF Read O6000000 O6000FFF Read O FFFOOO OTFFFFFF Read FFFFFEOO FFFFFFFF Read Program Mame Memory Loaded rea mi 4 JA b Memory Platform A Events The Status panel has three tabs Platform Contains information about the current status of the debugging platform typically including CPU type and mode run status and timing information Memory Contains information about the current memory status including the memory mapping resources and the areas used by the currently loaded object file Events Contains information about the current event breakpoint status including resource information 15 15 Viewing the function call history The Stack Trace window shows the function call history 15 15 1 Opening the Stack Trace Window To open the Stack Trace window choose View gt Code gt Stack Trace or click the Stack Trace toolbar button EA 204 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Configuration of Stack Trace window lag Stack Trace Op x Kind Name Value F funes short OxO0000094 P param 3 Ox00003 ta O0x00003 EdE short L local 3 D 3 Ox00003fd4 unsigned long F funee short OxD0000072 P param lt OxO00003tta Ox00003fe4 short L local z D2 Ox00003fe0 unsigned long F Euncl short Ox0000003e P param 1 Ox00003tfa Ox00003f 0 short L Local 1 D1 0x00003 fec unsigne
41. File To open a file 1 Select one of the following operations e Click the File Open toolbar button i OR e Press CTRL O OR e Select the File Open menu option 2 A File Open dialog will be displayed Use the directory browser to navigate to the directory in which the file you want to open is located Use the Files of Type combo box to select the type of file you want to open or set it to All Files to see every file in a directory 3 Once you have located the file select it and click Open You can also open a file via the Projects tab of the Workspace window Either double click the file you want to open or select it right click and then choose the Open lt file gt menu option on the pop up menu where lt file gt is the name of the file selected The High performance Embedded Workshop keeps track of the last five files that you have opened and adds them to the File menu under the File Recent Files sub menu This gives you a shortcut to opening the last 4 files that you have used To open a recently used file e Select the File Recent Files menu option and from this sub menu select the desired file 58 2CENESAS 4 4 4 Closing Files To close an individual file 4 Using the Editor Double click the Editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window OR Click on the Editor window s system menu located at the top left of each window and select the Close menu option O
42. Function Name list box a Selecting a function Click the function you wish to select in the Select Function Name list box and click the gt button You will see the selected function in the Set Function Name list box To select all functions in the Select Function Name list box click the gt gt button 216 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger b Deselecting a function Click the function you wish to deselect from the Set Function Name list box and click the lt button To deselect all functions click the lt lt button The deselected function s will be moved from the Set Function Name list box back to the Select Function Name list box c Setting a function Click the OK button to set the functions displayed in the Set Function Name list box The functions are set and the Select Function dialog box closes Click the Cancel button to close the dialog box without setting the functions 4 Debugging an Overlay Program Programs making use of the Overlay function can be debugged This section explains the settings for using the Overlay function a Displaying section group When the Overlay function is used i e when several section groups are assigned to the same address range the address ranges and section groups are displayed in the Overlay dialog box Overlay Address Section Name ale OO2000 O002008 Open the Overlay dialog box by choosing the Debug Overlay menu option This dialog box has two
43. INS PavitOnmMiC il 5 525 4sassieiortevessdtiedestarssendees iii 114 8 3 4 RO 61567 HAYA 8 ak O50 1 0 a eee eee E mente eee en ene ee ene eee ee ee 115 8 3 5 Specifying a User Name and Password cccccccccceceesseeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 115 SA CONHOMING EXSCUUOM g5 5 sccscscasccessnsaereanedneeooonanerensednensonnsaaneansondedonnavenennanvddedd denon byeesasasecasesananeeass 116 8 5 Importing and exporting a Set up cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 117 Usine Vival Source SAIE oeoc anoni sepa r aE a EEEE EE aE aE saad saad R aE EEAS 119 9 1 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to a workspace nnneeeeseseseeeeseeeereenreesrrereerrersrrrerrrerreresrerreren 119 2CENESAS Table Of Contents 9 1 1 Selecting Visual SourceSafe cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 119 9 1 2 Adding files to Visual SourceSafe ccccccccccscssccccccececcceccecceeeceeeeeeeececceeeeeeceseeeeeseeeeeeees 120 92 Visual SOUlCES ale COMMAS eerren EEr n e EE E EETA 120 9 2 1 Removing a File from Version Control ccccccscsssssssssessseeesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseseeaaaas 121 9 2 2 Getting a Read Only Copy of a File from Version Control nnnnnnnenenneneneeeeereererereeen 121 9 2 3 Checking Out a Writable Copy of a File from Version Control cccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeees 121 9 2 4 Checking In a Writable Copy of
44. Output on Fly option Click the Finish button to create the new phase By default the new phase 1s added to the bottom of the Build phase order list in the Build Order tab of the Build Phases dialog 3 3 Ordering Build Phases In a standard build shown in figure below you could add a phase at four different positions before the compiler before the assembler before the linker or after the linker You may place your own custom phases or move system phases to any position in the build order It is important to remember that if the output of your custom phase can be input into another phase then the phase order must be correct if the build 1s to behave as intended COMPILE ASSEMBLE Select the Build gt Build Phases menu option The Build Phases dialog will be displayed The build phase dialog provides facilities for ordering build phases via the Build Phases dialog It has two tabs which are concerned with the ordering of phases Build Order and Build File Order And then you can click OK button 41 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features 3 3 1 Build Order Tab phase is currently enabled A phase can be toggled on off by checking unchecking its corresponding checkbox respectively Build Order Build File Order File Mappines Build phase order MISH CAC Library Generator Add MISH O4O Compiler Modify WISH Assembler wlOptLinker Remove Custom Oy My Phase Move Up phase Mave ohh
45. TCL Too 1 02400 CAHEWSSystem SECSTOL Toolkits Register All Renesas M160 5 30 00 CHEWS Tools Henesass hT6C nics H85 H87300 Sta 6 0 20 CNHEWSTools Henesas Ho4 b 0 AN H85 H87300 Sta 6 0 3 0 CHEWS Tools Henesas Ho4 6 0 3s SuperH RISC en F000 CSHEWSTools Henesas Sh49 O Oss SuperH RISC en 901 0 CAHEWSTools HenesassShd 0 T s H85 H87300 Ser 2 0400 CAHEWST ools Henesas sDebuglorm SuperH RISC en 8 0400 CAHEWSTools Henesas Debuglom Genenc OOM Was 1 00 00 CAHEWSTools Henesas Debuglom 4 Search status 74 file s found To register a single component 1 Click the Register button on the Tools Administration dialog 2 Browse to the component s HRF file and click the OK button to register that component Note The HEW Registration File HRF is located in the root directory of a component s installation 5 4 Unregistering a Component The components that are registered with the HEW affect the way it behaves For example every compatible system tool that is registered will be added to the Tools menu when a new project is created Sometimes this may not be desirable If this is not required open the Tools Administration dialog select the undesired component from the Registered Components list and click the Unregister button A dialog will be invoked which asks you to confirm this action Click Yes to unregister the component Note Unregistering a component does not remove its installation
46. Using the Debugger 1 Selecting a session Detaultsess ion Defaultsession SimsessionsH 4 To select a session select one of the following operations e Select it from the drop down list box in the toolbar OR e Choose the Debug Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed Select the session that you want to use from the Current session drop down list box and click the OK button 2 Adding a session You can now create a session with a target attached and setup ready for use This session can be given a name and the target chosen To create a new session with a target attached and setup 1 Choose the File New Session menu option The New Session dialog box is displayed Hew Session 7 Session Name Create 4 new session oni SH 1 Simulator Cancel Session generator to use Renesas SH Project Generator 2 Enter the new session name Select the target you wish to use in the new session 4 Choose the session generator to use This should default to the correct selection However sometimes there may be multiple generators that support the same target 5 Click the OK button This should launch the generation process the process depends on the session generator that was selected At this point an additional dialog may be displayed for target setup options 6 When finished a new session 1s added to the current project It should be ava
47. Using the Debugger The functions defined in the checked items and the runtime function are included Enable all Selects all standard library functions Disable all Does not select all standard library functions Note that only the minimum required functions runtime and new are selected To move to Step 5 click the Next gt button in Step 4 New Project 5 9 Setting the Stack Area 5 Specify the stack area in Step 5 This is done by setting the initial value of the stack pointer and the stack size The initial value of the stack areas depends on the CPU selected in Step 1 Note The stack area is defined by stacksct h which is generated by the HEW If stacksct h has been modified by an editor it cannot be modified from Project gt Edit Project Configuration in the HEW To move to Step 6 click the Next gt button in Step 5 150 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger New Project 6 9 Setting the Vector PowerQh Reset HOOD Power On Reset CHite Manual Reset H 020 Manual Reset 6 Specify the vector in Step 6 Vector Definition Files Checking generates a vector definition file and a vector table setting function definition file Vector Handlers Handler Displays the handler program name of the reset vector To modify the handler program after selecting the handler program name by clicking on it enter the new handler program name Note that if the handler program is modified a reset program resetprg
48. When a new workspace is created the HEW will also automatically create a project with the name specified in the Project Name field and place it inside the new workspace The project types list displays all of the available project types e g Application Library etc Select the type of project that you want to create from this list The project types displayed will be all valid types for the current pair of CPU family and Toolchain The project types are classified in three classes toolchain only debugger only and full project generator that configures both the debugger and toolchain aspect of the HEW Click the OK button to create the new workspace and project This then launches the wizard you have selected to guide you through the creation process It is not possible to create a workspace if one already exists in the same directory 1 6 Opening a workspace To open a workspace l Select Browse to another project workspace option from the Welcome dialog box and click the OK button or select File gt Open Workspace The Open Workspace dialog box will be displayed Select the workspace file that you want to open Click the Open button to open the workspace If the HEW is set up to display information when a workspace is opened the Workspace Properties dialog box will be displayed Otherwise the workspace will be opened Note that whether the Workspace Properties dialog box is shown depends on the settin
49. a File into Version Control eeseeseeeeeeeeeenenereseeeeeen 121 9 2 5 Undoing a Check Out Operation cccceeecsseeseeesesssseesseeseseeseeeeeessesseasaasssaaasssaasaaaaaas 122 9 2 6 Viewing the Status OF PIG ys cecsciatciednccsnmeametobaiedndwanmedneiabaidsandomegnetosdedsaceduatesaeaeetsnnennstosteansests 122 2 1 Viewing the History of a File scccsciscnccsmennrenseoneteqnnesavcentooenscoseauseoseboeeenontsareentaauseeomenentetents 122 9 3 Visual SourceSafe Integration Options cccccccccccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseesesseeees 123 IO Nowork Facilities csee ETTA E EE EEE 125 10 1 Enabling network access cccccceeseseesessssseseseeseseseeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeaas 126 10 2 Setting the administrator user s password cccccceeeeeeeeeseseesessssesseesesssesesesssssessessseessseaasaaeas 126 103 Adding Hew users to The SYStCIN y lt cs cssicez ccancedeatolsasedadscequaxsscedaecdnseduatondajecsesuntorandectanaeduaearsaancesns 127 10 4 Changing your password cccccccceeessssssssseesesesseeesesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 128 10 5 Using the network HEW Service eeeesnsssssssssessenernnrerrrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrerrrrrrrrrrerrrrereeeeeeeeeeees 129 11 Conor 1802 9 gel e A E E A A Inman A E E E T E 131 11 1 Opening the Difference WIndOW cccccccccessseeseeseesseeseeeeeeeeeeseesee
50. access rights dialog is displayed Click the Add button The Add new user dialog is displayed This allows you as the administration user to add a new log in name and password Normally the password should be set to some default text or left blank Then click OK Once OK is clicked the user is added with read only rights To change the access level select the user you wish to modify and then click the required radio button Then click OK to save the access rights changes 127 2CENESAS 10 Network Facilities To remove an existing user to the system iF ee ae ae Log in with a user who has administrator access rights The process for doing this is described above Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog is displayed Select the Network tab Click the Access rights button The User access rights dialog is displayed Select the user you wish to remove in the users list Press the Remove button Then click OK to save the access rights changes User access rights EES Admin Admin quest F CCESE E Administrator Full readiinnite access Mead write fle access only i Mead onliaccess 10 4 Changing your password To change your password l 128 Se E Log into the HEW network database you are changing your password for Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog is displayed Select the Network tab Click the Password button Enter y
51. an issue with the component and it is working incorrectly additional information is displayed here Select the Environment tab if it exists to view and edit a component s environment settings This tab is most commonly used to modify the environment of a toolchain SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 3 Properties 7 x Environment variables PATH C SHEW T ools Renesas Shix_ bin SHL_INC C HEW T oole Renesas Sh e__ include SHC LIB C SHEWT oole Rlenesas Sh_ x Bin Wadi SHO _TMP C 4 Temp c Renae rea Add 81 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration To add a new environment variable 1 Click the Add button The Environment Variable dialog will be invoked 2 Enter the variable name into the Variable field 3 Enter the variable s value into the Value field 4 Click the OK button to add the new variable to the Environment tab To modify an environment variable 1 Select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment tab 2 Click the Modify button The Environment Variable dialog will be invoked 3 Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields 4 Click the OK button to modify the environment variable Environment arnable ki x Variable OF pa K Cancel Value l Placeholder SIT OOLDIR sbin pop up Henly To remove an environment variable 1 Select the variable that you want to remove from the Environment tab 2 Click the R
52. and Assembler which shows the disassembled mnemonics with labels when available Optionally any source line starting at that address may be shown thus providing mixed mode display To view mixed mode disassembly click View mixed mode button on this view Configuration of Disassembly window a Disassembly View med mode View Disassembly Sq Breakpoints 4SM column Code S W Breakpoints ASM column Option Pop up menu options Lock Refresh View Source Go To Cursor Set PC Here Set Address Edit Find in Range Copy Label column width Save Disassembly Text Print Toggle Breakpoint Enable Disable Breakpoint Address Label Display the PC location 5 breakpoints Setting PC breakpoint by double click binimonic Clicking the right hand mouse button displays a pop up menu containing available options Function It is possible to lock an memory range in the disassembly so that it does not refresh Launch editor at location in source Commences to execute the user program starting from the current PC address The program will continue to run until the PC reaches the address indicated by the text cursor not the mouse cursor or another break condition is satisfied Change the value of the PC to the address indicated by the text cursor not the mouse cursor Enter a new start address Modify the instruction at that address Searches the range for the specified text strin
53. aoga R aoo Rs OO00 AQ aoo Al aoo FE aoga USE aoo ISP aoga Pe OFOOOO 4 rex u xojaj z ojc 0 ooo d To reference the register data of Banko select Bank0 menu option with the Register window active Through the operation of option Bank0O and Bank1 the value of flag does not change To switch the bank you can also use the pop up menu which is displayed by clicking the mouse right button on the register display area in the Register window or change the value of flag If you change the value of flag the register bank also changes in response to the value Note Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 15 7 4 Setting the Layout To set the layout of the Register Window choose Layout menu from the register Window pop up menu The followings can be selected Radix Switch display or non display of radix FLAGs Switch display or non display of flags display area When the radix or flag is shown the option is checked 195 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger When the radix and flags are displayed Value Radix RO OOOO001L0 Hex Rl OOOO00FO Hex Ra OOO40001 Hex z MD RB EL FD M Q IMASE Ds IMASE Iz 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 IMASE 1 IMASE IO 5 T FR 52 PR DN 1 1 01l oO O 1 CAUSE Ej CAUSE Y CAUSE 4 CAUSE 0j CAUSE O j 0 0 0 CAUSE I ENABLE Y ENABLE 2 ENABLE 0 T 0 0 T ENABLE U ENABLE I FLAG FLAG z FLAG O 0 0 0 0 0 FLAG U F
54. areas the Address list box and the Section Name list box The Address list box displays the address ranges used by the Overlay function Click to select one of the address ranges in the Address list box Address Section Mame OOL000 o001023 Psect0Ol1 Psectil las O02000 002008 Psecthe Psectile PsectO3 Psectis Lancel The Section Name list box displays the section groups assigned to the selected address range 217 sQENESAS 15 Using the Debugger b Setting section group When using the Overlay function the highest priority section group must be selected in the Overlay dialog box otherwise the HEW will operate incorrectly Firstly click one of the address ranges displayed in the Address list box The section groups assigned to the selected address range will then be displayed in the Section Name list box Click to select the section group with the highest priority among the displayed section groups Overlay Address Section Name O01000 001023 PsectoOl Psectil OO2000 002008 Poere tie Paect 13 Psectog Psectl1s After selecting a section group clicking the OK button stores the priority setting and closes the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without storing the priority setting Note Within the address range used by the Overlay function the debugging information for the section specified in the Overlay dialog box is referred to Therefore the same section of the currently
55. bus state controller and a watchdog timer Accessing registers which are mapped to the micro controller s address space programs the on chip peripherals Since the setting up and use of these on chip peripheral registers 1s usually very important in an embedded micro controller application it is useful to be able to look clearly at the contents of these registers The Memory view only allows you to look at data in memory as byte word long word single precision floating point double precision floating point or ASCII values so the HEW also provides an I O Registers view to ease the inspection and setting up of these registers To open an I O Registers view select the View gt CPU gt IO menu option or click the View I O toolbar button El Modules that match the on chip peripherals organize the I O register information When an I O Registers view is first opened only a list of module names is displayed 15 6 1 Opening the IO Window To open the IO window select View gt CPU gt IO or click the View IO toolbar button pE Modules that match the on chip peripheral modules organize the I O register information When the IO window is first opened only a list of module names is displayed 191 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Configuration of IO window Toolbar 8 A Memory Managemen E a PTEH FFOOO000 FFOOOO000 mn FFOO0004 oOo0000000 FFOOOO08 oo000000 FFOOOO00c FFOOOO A FFOOO0010 OOoO000000
56. button Selecting the Show file path check box shows the full path of the file 15 1 3 Editing Project Configuration If you are using the H8 or SH toolchains then it is possible to configure the simulator again using the project generator This feature is not enabled for the demonstration project type l 156 Click on the Project gt Edit Project Configuration The Edit Project Configuration dialog is displayed Click on the Target tab Select the target you wish to use and then click OK CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 1 4 Configuring the debugging platform Before you can load a program into your debugging platform you must set it up to match your application s system The items that must be set up are typically device type operating mode clock speed and the memory map It is particularly important to set up the memory map as you must have memory in the debugging platform into which your user code will be loaded In the High performance Embedded Workshop the project generation process will have completed much of this work However if you are using a different configuration of board from the standard types then some customization will be essential 1 Setup To set up the debugging platform configuration choose the Setup Simulator menu option or the Setup Emulator menu option Under this sub menu will be the menus which can be used to configure your debug platform In the case of the SH famil
57. button to add the modified variable back to the list 114 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System To remove an environment variable 1 Select the variable that you want to remove from the Environment list 2 Click the Remove button beside the list 8 3 4 Specifying Comments If a version control command contains the placeholder COMMENT the HEW will request that you enter the comment when the command is executed via the Please Enter Comment dialog You may specify a comment for each file or if you would like to specify the same comment for all files check the Apply comment to all files checkbox before clicking the OK button 8 3 5 Specifying a User Name and Password Most version control tools will require you to pass a username and password on the command line in order to keep files secure and to keep a record of which files were changed by which users The custom version control support provides two placeholders User Login Name USERNAME and User Login Password PASSWORD When the command is executed these placeholders will be replaced with the current settings in the General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog In order to give the USERNAME and PASSWORD fields a value you will first need to login If you have not logged in before a command is executed which uses either of these placeholders then you will be prompted to do so before the command can be executed To
58. click on a file that has previously been excluded from build in the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select the Include Build lt file gt option where lt file gt is the selected file from the pop up menu The red cross will be removed from the file s icon Ey and the file will be included in build 2 4 File extensions and file groups The HEW can identify files by their extension The system defines certain extensions depending upon the tools that are being used For example if you are using a compiler then the c extension will be in the C source file group and will be used as input to the compiler phase Additionally the HEW allows you to define your own extensions For example if the project you are developing uses assembler source files the default extension may be src If you would like to use a different extension instead of src e g asm then you can define a new extension and request that the HEW treats it in the same way as a src file File extensions and file groups can be viewed and modified via the File Extensions dialog which is invoked by selecting the Project gt File Extensions menu option This dialog displays all the extensions and file groups that are defined within the current workspace 18 2CENESAS 2 Build basics File Extensions Gosolute tile Assembly include file Cancel Assembly list tile Assembly source tile Hesembly source file Remove Add Assembly source
59. control tool can be modified via the following three checkboxes Prompt before executing command If this checkbox is set then before any version control commands are executed a dialog is displayed which lists all of the files involved in the operation Files may be deselected by clearing the associated checkbox Clicking the OK button will apply the command to each of the selected files Clicking the Cancel button will abort the operation 0K c Nhew demo denna ee ivf sbrk c c Nhew demo denna Cancel Wl vectbl se chew derno demal Run in DOS window By default the output of the version control commands is redirected to the Version Control tab of the Output window If you would rather run each command in a separate DOS window then set this checkbox Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter By default when the HEW substitutes the VCDIR placeholder it uses the backward slash character to divide directories However if the version control system you are using uses a forward slash character e g Visual SourceSafe to divide directories then set the Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter checkbox 116 CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System 8 5 Importing and exporting a Set up Each workspace can have a different version control setup The HEW allows you to store the version control settings independently so that you can impor
60. double clicking on the instruction that you wish to change The Assembler dialog box will be displayed Assembler Ei Address Code o0002408 01 5F Mnemonic EEE MOW L fa H 01 0 8 PC A1 The address machine code and disassembled instructions are shown Type the new instruction or edit the old instruction in the Mnemonic field Pressing ENTER will assemble the instruction into memory and move on to the next instruction Clicking the OK button will assemble the instruction into memory and close the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button or pressing ESC will close the dialog box Note The assembly language display is disassembled from the actual machine code in the debugging platform s memory If the memory contents are changed the dialog box and Disassembly view will show the new assembly language code but the source view will be unchanged This is true even if the source file contains assembler 15 2 7 Disassembly find in range The disassembly find in range can be used to find a certain text string in the disassembly window between two addresses Right click on the disassembly window and select Find in range The Find in range dialog is displayed Find in Range Ei Ei Find Start Address Cancel End Address Enter your search string the start and end address that should be searched Click OK The view then selects the first instance of that string in the range Note Subsequent find operati
61. from the hard disk It simply removes the information that the HEW was storing about that component i e it disconnects it from the HEW The action can be easily reversed at any time by registering the tool manually see section 5 3 Registering a Component If you want to remove a component from the hard disk 1 e uninstall a component then refer to section 5 6 Uninstalling a component 80 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration 5 5 Viewing and Editing Component Properties To view information regarding a component select it from the Registered Components list on the Tools Administration dialog and click the Properties button The Properties dialog will be displayed The General tab displays the name version and location of the selected component SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 2 X Properties Ei EY General Information Environment Mame SuperH ASC engine Standard Toolchain Version oe Location CAHE T ools Aenesas Shk_ Cancel Select the Information tab to view any information about the component This may include copyright information enhancements and so on SuperH RISC engine Standard Toolchain 3 Properties EI EI General Information Environment Informations High performance Embedded Workshop Super RISC engine Standard Toolchain Wx Super RISC engine C C Standard Library Generator Wo UKE Super RISC engine C C Compiler ME AAAA If there is
62. get tool error feedback 1 Click the Tools gt Administration menu item 2 Select the tool in the list that has an issue 3 Click Properties 4 Select the information tab and scroll the edit field to the bottom 5 The reason for the problem will be displayed in this area 85 CENESAS 5 Tools Administration 5 8 Using On Demand components The HEW version 3 0 onwards has the concept of on demand components These components are not automatically loaded by the application or the debugger component These components can be loaded by the user or as part of the project generation process To load or unload an on demand component manually 1 Click the Project gt Components menu item 2 The component gallery dialog is displayed 3 Select the component you wish to load Click the load button The components image should change to the loaded state 4 If you wish to unload a component Select the component Click the unload button The components image should change to the unloaded state 5 Click OK to verify the changes Component Gallery rect fiear eeaaenaeaunonant o Application Extensions ITRON component Custom memory view component Fin view component Loaded component Unloaded component Intermediate state component Unload Note Each project in your workspace can have different components loaded and unloaded If you have multiple projects you can use the Mult
63. i 2 Click the Check In Files toolbar button amp or select the Tools Version Control Check In Files menu option 9 2 5 Undoing a Check Out Operation Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive Once a file is checked out it is edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users However if the check out operation was carried out by mistake or perhaps is no longer required then the operation can be undone To undo a check out of a file s from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s upon which you would like to undo a previous check out operation You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select the Tools Version Control gt Undo Check Out menu option 9 2 6 Viewing the Status of a File Although files appear in your HEW project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window Visual SourceSafe is not necessarily controlling them Some of the files that are being controlled by Visual SourceSafe will be checked in and others will be checked out 1 e being edited by a user The Status of Files command displays the current status of a file or file s To view the status of a file s in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s whose st
64. inside the Navigation tab a pop up menu will be invoked 2 Select Refresh Note The navigation items are displayed gradually as the files are scanned This means it may take some time 1f there are many files to fully complete the Navigation view update Files are rescanned when they are saved This means that navigation information will not be available for new classes and functions until the file or files are saved 12 1 C Function and define navigation component These components simply add the function and define definitions to the navigation view Workspace BE C define navigation category title Hdefine C function navigation category title ANSI C function Saal a Projects E Templates Navigation To jump to a definition Select either of the following ways e Double click a function or a define definition on the Navigation tab e Right click on a function or a define definition on the Navigation tab Select Go to Definition from the pop up menu 134 2CENESAS 12 Navigation Facilities 12 2 C Navigation component The C navigation component is the most complicated of the three supported navigation components It supports the following structures in the view for C source files The basic structure of the information is shown below Workspace C navigation category title Clase name Class member f functions Private member varlable z Frotected member ee m
65. is automatically aligned 1 e automatically indented void myFunction yoid void myFunction void 1 i int int e LU 20 int int y int z 0 int z i Auto Indentation Disabled tt Auto Indentation Enabled To enable disable Auto Indentation 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Setup Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab 2 Set the Enable Auto Indentation checkbox accordingly 3 Click the OK button for the new settings to take effect W Enable auto indentation 4 10 Splitting a Window The HEW editor allows you to split a text window into two The split bar button is located just underneath the maximize button at the top right hand corner of any text window as shown below __ Pale Split Bar To split a window e Double click the split bar button to split the window in half or click on the split bar button keep the button pressed drag the mouse down and then release the mouse button at the point you want to split the window To adjust the position of the split bar e Click on the split bar itself keep the button pressed then move the bar to the new position and then release the button To remove the split bar e Double click on the split bar or move the split bar to the top or bottom of the window 66 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 11 Changing the Editor Font The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to specify
66. is set to 0 to the maximum address of MCU 15 3 12 Starting address to value of the register Select the register from the followings in the pop up menu Register of the memory window Note Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 15 3 13 Tracking the stack pointer position The memory window has a function that alters the display address while tracking the stack pointer position By default the display does not track the stack pointer position To track the stack pointer position choose Followed Stack Pointer option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Followed Stack Pointer dialog box is displayed 180 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Followed Stack Pointer EJ R Stack Forter Cancel Select the stack pointer to track from the drop down list box The Memory Window has its display addresses automatically altered by tracking the selected stack pointer position Selecting Not Following in the Followed Stack Pointer dialog box causes the debugger to stop tracking the stack pointer position Note Mot Follow mE Y Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 15 3 14 Changing the Program Display Position Immediately After Downloading To specify the source file position select Set Start Up Symbol option from pop up menu of the memory window The Set start up symbol dialog box is displayed Set start up symbol Ei Ei 1 wz Input
67. l 2 10 11 Select the Debug Debug Settings menu option The Debug Settings dialog will be displayed In the project tree select the project and configurations to which you want to add a download module Click the Add button The Download Module dialog is displayed Download Module E Ose NINN zE Format E Dwart2 Cancel Filename COMFIGDIAS PROJECT NAME abs Browse ACCess Size i l Download debug information only Perform memory verify during download T Download automatically on target connection All fields must be setup for the download module to be configured correctly The first field is Offset This is the memory address offset the module will be loaded at It defaults to 0 The Format drop down list box contains a list of supported object format Note this does not have to match the default object format However you can only debug modules that match the format specified in the debug settings dialog default object format field The Filenames can be specified with placeholders or as an absolute setting It is recommended to use placeholders in the same manner as CONFIGDIR PROJECTNAME abs The Access size field specifies the access width when the memory is accessed This option is often used by hardware design engineers when testing their hardware For the purposes of this demonstration the default value should be used The Download debug information only c
68. list depends on the CPU model and selected register When you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press ENTER The dialog box closes and the new value is written into the register 15 7 7 Setting the Flag Value When the flag itself is displayed Click the button of the flag to be changed Every time you click the button the flag status 1 0 is switched If a flag is composed of multiple bits a dialog is opened where you can enter a value to be changed izte EF T When the flag is displayed in the register Double click the FLG line A dialog is opened Enter the value to be changed 197 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 7 8 Splitting Up the Window Display To vertically divide the Register window display into two select Split from the pop up menu and move the split up bar Moving the split up bar to the top end or bottom end of the window cancels the split up display 15 7 9 Saving Register Contents To save register contents in a text file choose Save To File menu from the register pop up menu The Save As dialog box shown below will be displayed Specify the file name 15 7 10 Using register contents It can be useful to be able to use the value contained in a CPU register when you are entering a value elsewhere in the HEW for example when displaying a specified address in the Disassembly or Memory views You can do this by specifying the register name prefixed by t
69. location of the program counter PC In some cases for example if a project has been moved from its original path the source files may not be automatically found In this case the HEW will open a source file browser dialog to allow you to manually locate the file this path will then be used to update any other source files in this debug project 15 2 1 Viewing the code To view a source file s code double click on its icon in the file tree or right click on the source file and click the Open option on the pop up menu The HEW opens the file in the integrated editor The editor is divided into two areas the Gutter area containing markers for breakpoints PC location etc and the Text area containing color syntax highlighted code This is shown in the figure below Configuration of Editor window w 5H4 Demo c a ola OOO00e sac View mired made View Source View Disassembly a long al10 min max lone jJ al int i OOO00z2Z she ooo002z3c6 for j 0 i lt 10 i Uf HA Line Number column SAW Breakpointe column Test area Source Address column 167 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Line Number column Source Address column S W Breakpoints column Text area Option Pop up menu options Displays the line number for the source file After your program has been downloaded the Editor window displays the addresses for the current source file Display the PC location 5 bre
70. login i e specify a username and password 1 Select the Tools Version Control Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed Select the General tab Commands Projects General Execution IW Prompt before executing command T Run in DOS Window i Bose DOS mindan an exit Use forward slash as version control directory delimiter User details User JHARE Password ae Configuration file Current version control configuration file CAHE Project Projecti hwc Click the Log In button The Log in dialog will be displayed Enter your username into the User name field Enter your password into the Password field Re type your password again into the Confirm password by retyping it below field a E a E Click the OK button to set the new username and password If there is any inconsistency between the two versions of the password that you entered you will be requested to type your password again 115 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System Log in 7 User name JHARK Cancel Password Pcie Confirm password by retyping it below Pretec 8 4 Controlling Execution The General tab of the Version Control Setup dialog allows you to control the way in which the version control tool 1s executed It also shows the full path to the current version control configuration file The execution of a version
71. name from the Window menu OR e Select its tab at the bottom of the editor window When a file has been edited an asterisk is appended to the window s title bar The asterisk remains there until the file is saved The asterisk is also removed if all of the edited changes are undone in the current window 4 zbrke Be nr nth cach ch chah antes ik fe FILE Teed fal ha To eo ease A o gt resetpreac lt gt dbesctc Selecting text in the editor It is possible to select text in the same manner as all editors However to access column selection hold down the ALT key while you are selecting the text with the mouse This changes the selection technique from line to column selection 55 CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 2 Integrated disassembly view in the editor The HEW editor in version 4 0 onwards has been enhanced to include an integrated disassembly view This integrated view has a toolbar which allows the switching of mode When each mode is available it is possible to click the button and change to the new view This toolbar is shown below View Source View med mode View Disassembly maini void sort void change pog0 3arc void maini l Three different modes are possible these are listed below Mode Function View Source This mode is the standard HEW editor It allows source file editing and keywords are highlighted correctly if you are viewing source files In this view you can view lin
72. of the input files do not exist 5 Select the Environment tab to edit the environment settings for the phase Command Environment Environment settings PAaTH C 4T ools SHOW ALLSF ALSE 6 Use the Add Modify and Remove buttons to add modify and remove environment variables respectively 7 Click the OK button when all modifications have been made Note You can only change the environment of a system phase via the Tools Administration dialog To remove a custom phase 1 Select the phase to be removed and click the Remove button 2 Click the OK button to confirm the new settings To import a custom phase 1 Click the Import button The Import Custom Phase dialog is displayed which allows you to browse to an existing project from which you want to import a custom phase 2 Choose the location of the project from which you want to import a custom phase Once selected the Import Phase dialog is displayed which lists the custom phases in the imported project 3 Once you have decided which phase to import highlight it in the list and click the OK button The phase will then be added to the Build Phases dialog at the bottom of the build order 43 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features 3 3 2 Build File Order Tab If you were to select a C source file from the Workspace window and then activate Build gt Build File or press you would expect the file to be compiled Likewise
73. open file field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the file to be opened 5 Enter the arguments required to open a file at a specific line into Arguments to open file at line field Use the FULLFILE placeholder to represent the path of the file to be opened and the LINE placeholder to represent the line number at which the cursor should be initially positioned See the Placeholders topic for further information on placeholders 6 Click the OK button to define the editor Note When using an external editor be aware of the following issues e Each time you invoke the external editor in whichever way a separate instance of the editor will be launched e You must save your own files before you perform a Build Build All or Build File operation 6 10 Customizing the font in your views The HEW contains many components which you may wish to make look differently It is possible to change the font and text colouring for the views To change the look of your windows 1 Click the Setup gt Format Views menu item 2 Select the view you are interested in changing the appearance of To change all views select the All views category 3 Expand the item in the tree to see all items you can change the look of 4 Select the item Notice the tab changes on the right of this dialog 5 Change the font or text colour 6 Click OK to save the changes and the views will be automatically updated with the ne
74. or character to be set in the Data field Select the Verify check box Support for verify function depends on the debugging platform When setting the value Click the Value button in the Data Type group Specify the data length in the Length field When setting the character Click the String button in the Data Type group Specify the character code in the Code field 15 3 3 Selecting a Memory Range If the memory address range is in the Memory view you can select the range by clicking on the first memory unit depending on your Memory view display choice and dragging the mouse to the last unit The selected range is highlighted 175 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 3 4 Filling an Area of Memory with Constant Data You can set the contents of a range of memory addresses to a value using the memory fill feature Select an address range to fill in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Fill option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Fill dialog box is displayed Fill start Address OOOOU000 Fal End Address foooo007F ait zal Data ajla r Data Type Vale C String Length fi byte Enter the data value or character to be filled in the Data field Select the Verify check box Support for veri
75. or not toolchain type and the debugger in use 13 1 Graphically display map information of each map type To graphically display map information of each map type 1 Click the Map button eed on the toolbar 2 The Map Properties dialog box is displayed Hap Properties 7 Map type Physical memory map Memory resource Linker map list Linker section setting Cancel 3 Select map types you wish to display from Map type Physical memory map The memory map will be displayed Memory resource The memory resource will be displayed Linker map list Use the toolchain and check Generate list file in the List category on Link Library The linker map list will be displayed after a build Linker section setting Use the toolchain Information set in the Section category on Link Library will be displayed 4 Click the OK button Note Physical memory map and Memory resource are displayed graphically when the simulator debugger is connected and the memory map and memory resource are set Linker map list and Linker section setting are displayed graphically when the toolchain is in use 137 2CENESAS 13 Map Configuration of Map Window As shown in following figure map information of checked map types is displayed graphically In following figure a blue dot on the guide indicates the position of currently displayed addresses The green line across the map types indicates the current c
76. project can be thought of as a container of project files Thus each workspace contains one or more projects and each project contains one or more files The figure below illustrates this graphically PROJECT PROJECT WORKSPACE PROJECT Workspaces allow you to group related projects together For example you may have an application that needs to be built for different processors or you may be developing an application and library at the same time Projects can also be linked hierarchically within a workspace which means that when one project 1s built all of its child projects are built first However workspaces on their own are not very useful we need to add a project to a workspace and then add files to that project before we can actually do anything 1 2 Main window There are three main windows the Workspace window the Editor window and the Output window The Workspace window shows the projects and files that are currently in the workspace the Editor window provides file viewing and editing facilities and the Output window shows the results of a various processes e g build version control commands and so on 2CENESAS 1 Overview Tithe bar 3 SH4demo High performance Embedded Workshop dbsct c Wenu bar File Edit View Project Build Debug Setup Tools Window Help Options x penga ha t w JAR A Toolbars Workspace window OG a ga SH4demo H E Assembly source file
77. system files will be added to the selected file list For example selecting the project folder will also add the project file to the file list If the project file is then checked out and the version is newer than when it was last loaded you will be asked whether you want to reload the project Click the Add Files toolbar button ids or select the Tools gt Version Control gt Add Files menu option When you add files to Visual SourceSafe the local versions in your working directory will become read only To check that the Add Files operation was carried out as you expected or to quickly review the status of all of the files in a project l pA Select the project folder whose files you want to check in the Workspace window Click the Status of Files toolbar button A or select the Tools gt Version Control Status of Files menu option The status of each file will be displayed in the Version Control tab of the Output window The information shown includes whether the file is added to the project 1f the file is checked out and if it is checked out who did so 9 2 Visual SourceSafe commands The following 8 operations are available Adding files to version control Remove a file from version control Get a read only copy of a file or files Check out a read write copy of a file or files i e for editing Check in a previously checked out file or files 1 e update Visual SourceSafe with the edits made Un
78. than or equal to gt 1 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform Register names SH H8 RS8C E7 E8 family Register names may be used but must always be prefixed by the character Enter a numeric expression e g pc 205 2 and display the result in all currently supported radices M32C M32R M16C R8C excluding E7 E8 family Register names may be used but must always be prefixed by the character Enter a numeric expression e g Yopct 205 2 and display the result in all currently supported radices 75 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor Character Constants Characters enclosed in single quote marks may be use as character constants For example A etc These character constants are converted to ASCII code and used as 1 byte immediate values Character String Literals Character strings enclosed in double quote marks may be use as character string literals Examples are abc etc 76 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration 5 Tools Administration You can control the components that are used by the High performance Embedded Workshop via the Tools Administration dialog which is invoked by selecting the Tools Admzunistration menu option The Tools Administration dialog is only accessible when no workspace is open Tools Administration Ei Registered components Version E Cancel Bay Toolchains z H85 H8 300 Standard Toolchain 6 0 3
79. the Keyword field of the Add Keyword dialog box specify a keyword which consists of only alphanumerics an underscore and the character 4 12 4 Enabling disabling syntax coloring To enable disable Syntax Coloring 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab 2 Set the Enable Syntax Coloring checkbox as necessary and then click the OK button M Enable syntax coloring 69 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 13 Templates When developing software it is often necessary to enter the same text repeatedly for instance when typing a function definition for loop or a comment block for a function The HEW editor allows you to specify a block of text or template which can be inserted into the currently active Editor window Thus once a template has been defined it can be automatically inserted without the need to re enter it manually Figure below shows a list of templates which is located on the Templates tab of the Workspace window M File E Toolchain Templates al Mawigation Any new templates which have been added to the HEW are displayed under the templates folder The toolchain templates folder is for templates which are read only and have been provided for use in the HEW system by the current toolchain Templates in this view can be dragged for insertion into an editor file It is also possible to drag an area of text from the edito
80. the Platform tab of the Output view 202 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 13 2 Standard PC breakpoints When you are trying to debug your program you will want to be able to stop the program running when it reaches specific points in your code You can do this by setting a program counter PC breakpoint on the line or instruction at which to want the execution to stop The following instructions will show you how to quickly set and clear simple PC breakpoints If more complex breakpoint operation is supported by the target it may provide a Breakpoints view To set a program counter PC breakpoint 1 Make sure that the Disassemble or Source view is open at the place at which you want to set a PC breakpoint 2 Select the Toggle Breakpoint pop up menu item or press F9 at the line showing the address at which you want the program to stop You will see a red circle appear in the gutter to indicate that a PC breakpoint has been set 4 Itis also possible to add remove and edit the current breakpoint setup by selecting the Edit Breakpoints menu option 5 Now when you run your program and it reaches the address at which you set the PC breakpoint execution halts with the message PC Breakpoint displayed in the Debug tab and the Source or Disassembly view is updated with the PC breakpoint line highlighted Note The line or instruction at which you set a PC breakpoint is not actually executed the program stops
81. the address edit field where the input is evaluated Display Address Ei Address main b zal OOOO0000 FFFFFFFF main sort Cancel 257 CENESAS 9 Using Labels to View Your Code 258 2CENESAS 10 Integrated Toolbars in a Components View 10 Integrated Toolbars in a Components View The HEW 4 0 onwards has the capability to include a toolbar in a views client area This toolbar allows the views functionality to be accessed quickly from this integrated toolbar Various views in the HEW system have this functionality One example is the Difference view This is shown below Difference Al dha a FS CAHE workspace MiG APP 4007 001 i1 6C_ Toolbar CAH EW Workspace SHd Demo sH4 Demo sHa 53 53 al void mainlvoid void mainlyoid ssf is 36 a7 t a The toolbar allows access to key Difference view features It is also possible to customize the toolbar further This can be achieved via the pop up menu of the toolbar or the component itself If you right click on the toolbar itself the following menu is displayed w Toolbar Customize The top menu option named Toolbar switches showing hiding of the toolbar the toolbar is hidden in the figure below Difference CHEW Wworkspace M16G APP 4007 O01 h1 6C_ CAHE WE Workspace 5H4 DemoxtsHd DemotsHe Pe maintvoid ha maintvoid The final menu option named Customize launches the
82. the custom phase being added to the project To select a file group check the box next to the file group s name One or more file groups can be selected in this dialog Step 3 The third step requests the fundamental information about the new build phase Enter the name of the phase into the Phase name field Enter the location of the program file into the Command field do not insert any command line options as these options are specified via the Options menu of the HEW menu bar Specify the default options for the phase i e what options you would like new files to take when added to the project into the Default Options field If you have a preferred directory in which you would like this program to run i e where you want the current working directory to be set to before the tool is executed then enter it into the Initial directory field 39 CENESAS 3 Advanced build features New Build Phase Step 3 of 4 i ES W i Phase name MyPhase Command excluding parameters C Tools MyT ool exe p Browse Default options S FULLFILE Initial directory S CONFIGDIR p Browse Step 4 The fourth and final step allows you to specify any environment variables that the phase requires New Build Phase Step 4 of 4 Does the command require any environment variables to be set lf eo enter them into the list below Modify Remove Read Output On Fly lt Back Finish Cance
83. the delete key can also be used instead of the pop up To modify a user folder name 1 Select the folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click and then select Modify folder name 3 Enter the new name in the dialog 4 Click OR 35 2CENESAS 2 Build basics 36 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features 3 Advanced build features 3 1 The build process revisited 3 1 1 What is a build Building a project means applying a set of tools upon certain input files in order to produce the desired output Thus we apply a compiler upon C C source files in order to create object files we apply an assembler upon assembler source files in order to create object files and so forth At each step or phase of the build we apply a different tool upon a different set of input files The figure below presents a different view of the build process BEGIN fs PHASE 1 Phase 1 Input Files i PHASE 2 Phase 2 Input Files Phase 2 Output Files 5 Phase Input Files Phase Output Files The High performance Embedded Workshop provides the ability to change this build process via its Build Phases dialog which can be accessed by selecting the Build gt Build Phases menu option On the left hand side are the phases that are defined in the current project Build Order Build File Order l File Mappings l Build phase order SH CrC Library Gene
84. the font to be used in its internal editor All Editor windows regardless of the file type use the same font To change the editor font 1 Select the Setup gt Format Views menu option The Format Views dialog will be displayed 2 Click on the source icon 3 The font tab should be available on the right of the format views dialog Select the font type and size in the drop lists When this is being modified the sample text below shows what the font will look like 4 Click the OK button for the new font settings to take effect Fort Font Courier Hen Point Size 10 HEW Sample Text 4 12 Syntax Coloring 4 12 1 Syntax coloring To enhance code readability the HEW editor can display specific strings 1 e keywords in different colors For instance C source code comments could be shown in green and C types e g int could be shown in blue The coloring method used can be specified on a file group by file group basis For example you can define different color schemes for C source files text files map files or even your own files Note When you create a new file syntax coloring will not be active as a new file does not initially have an extension new files are named arbitrarily by the editor without an extension In order to activate syntax coloring you must save the new file with a name and extension that the HEW recognizes See the File extensions and file groups topic for information on fil
85. the other docked windows menu bar or toolbar e Drag the control bar of a docked window while pressing the Ctrl key CENESAS 1 Overview To hide the Workspace window or the Output window Select one of the following operations e Click on the close button which is located in the top right corner of the window OR e Right click anywhere inside a floating window and select the Hide option on the pop up menu To show the Workspace window or the Output window Select the View gt Workspace or View gt Output menu option respectively 1 2 5 Editor window The editor window is where you will work with the files of your project The HEW allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them and to edit them in whichever order you want to By default the editor window is displayed in a notebook style This means that each file has a separate tab associated with it to aid in navigating between files see the figure below pragma section DSEC static canst struct f char rom fe Start address of the initialized data char rom_e ft End address of the initialized data se char tram 3 ft Start address of the initialized data tOTBL J __sectop D secend D sectopl RJ pragma section BSEC static const struct f char 6 33 ft Start address of non initialized data char 6 8 End address of non initialized data se tBTBL J __sectopl B secend B st m H
86. tile Binary file Open with C header file C list file source file G header file C lhet file The File Extensions list is divided into two columns On the left are the file extensions and on the right are the file groups associated with the extensions Many file extensions can belong to the same group For example assembler source files may have several extensions in a single project e g src asm mar etc a ay et os AZM MMAF Assembler source files T source files Library files 2 4 1 Associating an application with a file group In addition to opening a file with the editor the File Extensions dialog allows you to associate any application with any file group so that when you double click on a file in the Projects tab of the Workspace window the appropriate application is launched with the file 19 CENESAS 2 Build basics File Extensions Extension Group ie Ipp Text editor cpp 7 Cpu Word processor WI doc exp B hex ee lib Z lbp map fey obj Librarian No application list Tile C source file CPU information tile Documents ets Expanded assembly source file cee Hex file Library tile per with Library information file Linkage map file Linkage symbol file Object tile ail To associate an application with a file group 1 Select the Project gt File Extensions menu option from the menu bar The Fi
87. to CTRL Z CTRL A Select all in the editor May also work in other windows CTRL Copy CTRL D Open the disassembly window CTRL F Find CTRL G Goto line CTRL H Replace CTRL I Open the IO window CTRL L Open the command line window CTRL K Open the stack trace window CTRL M Open the memory window CTRL N Create a new source file in the editor CTRL O Open the open file dialog CTRL P Print CTRL R Open the registers window CTRL S Save the current file CTRL U Open the status window CTRL V Paste CTRL X Cut CTRL Y Redo CTRL Z Undo CTRL Break Stop build CTRL F2 Toggle bookmark CTRL F4 Close file CTRL F7 Build file CTRL F9 Enable and disable breakpoints CTRL Cursor up Scroll window up and leave the cursor in the same place in the editor CTRL Cursor down Scroll window down and leave the cursor in the same place in the editor CTRL Cursor left Move the cursor to the previous word in the editor CTRL Cursor right Move the cursor to the next word in the editor CTRL BACKSPACE Delete current word CTRL END Sends the cursor in the editor to the end of the current file CTRL HOME Returns the cursor in the editor to the beginning of the current file CTRL TAB Switch windows in the editor CTRL F6 Switch windows in the editor SHIFT F2 Previous bookmark SHIFT F5 Reset Go SHIFT ESC Hide output window SHIFT F11 Step out SHIFT F10 Show context menu Same as right click pop up menu SHIFT F12 Refresh a
88. v ve win32 JHARK 214436 c project is mapped to x vc project Please Enter Comment dialog is invoked 12 e a workspace named workspace is located at c hew workspace e a project named project is located at c hew workspace project e a configuration named debug has a configuration directory located at c hew workspace project debug HEW EXE is installed in c hew a HRF file of a toolchain i e compiler assembler linker is located in c hew toolchain renesas sh 5 11 This is referred to as TCINSTALL on the options setting dialogs of the Build menu and as TOOLDIR on the Tools Administration dialog the Windows operating system is installed in c windows and the Windows system directory is located at c windows system a version control executable path is v vc win32 ss exe a user name and its password to login to the version control system are JHARK and 214436 respectively COMMENT is specified in a command line to the version control executable c project is mapped to x ve project on the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog which is invoked via Tools gt Version Control gt Configure an error of compiler or assembler occurred at line 12 247 2CENESAS 4 Placeholders Note Not all of the placeholders are relevant in every field For example the LINE placehold
89. window Map Opens the Map window Command Line Ctrl L Opens the Command Line window TCL Toolkit Shift Ctrl K lt p See the Tcl Tk Additional document Workspace Alt K a Opens the Workspace window Output Alt U E Opens the Output window Disassembly Ctrl D Opens the Disassembly window CPU Registers Ctrl R Opens the Registers window Memory Ctrl M Opens the Memory window IO Ctrl I Opens the IO window Status Ctrl U Opens the Status window Graphic Image Shift Ctrl G Opens the Image window Waveform Shift Ctrl V Opens the Waveform window Code Stack Trace Ctri K lies Opens the Stack Trace window 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 1 4 List of Project Menu Menu Menu Option Keyboard Shortcuts Toolbar Button Function Project Set Current Project Set this project as the current project Insert Project Add project to workspace Dependent Projects Show dependent projects Edit Project Configuration Edit the project configuration Create Project Type Create a new project type Add Files Add file s to project Remove Files Remove file s from project File Extensions Display current project file extensions Components Load unload components 233 2CENESAS 1 List of Menus 1 5 List of Build Menu Menu Build Menu Option Toolchain Build File Build Build All Build Multiple Update All
90. 0 _ Supe tH RISC e ngine 5 tandard Toolchain OT Register bese System Tools gt Utility Phases Unregister BS Debugger Components 3 vee Binary File Object Reader 1 4 0 0 Properties EltO war Object reader 2 06 00 Generic Cache View ECS 1 03 00 Export vee Generic Code HCoverage View EL 1 03 00 x Generic Coverage View EC 2 02 00 search disk Genenc Data Hloverage View EDX 1 03 00 DA Generic EEPROM View ECX 1 03 00 ool information TI T anari Cankan CO Wr S ae Sa Of d Uninstaller M Show all components Curent HE tools database location CH Ew Modify There are five standard types of component Toolchain A Toolchain is a set of build phases e g compiler assembler linker and librarian These components provide the build capability System Tool A System Tool is an application EXE that can be launched from the Tools menu These are often provided as extra applications which support the toolchain e g an external debugger like the Hitachi Debugging Interface or an interactive graphical librarian Utility Phase A Utility Phase is a ready made build phase which supports some specific build functionality e g analyze complexity of source code count lines of source code etc These components provide added functionality to the build that is not toolchain specific Debugger Component A Debugger Component is a component that supports some specific debugger functi
91. 255 2CENESAS 8 Drag and Drop in the HEW debugger 256 2CENESAS 9 Using Labels to View Your Code 9 Using Labels to View Your Code Labels are a useful way of navigating through your debug module It is possible to use labels in any edit field that allows addresses If you enter a label in such a field then the built in evaluator will check the label and then convert it to an address This allows you to enter evaluations such as main 100 or MyFunction 100 This means that any times that labels are used the addresses which will be evaluated are not fixed This is especially useful if you are using a command line batch file to set a number of breakpoints The command line batch file might always need to set a breakpoint on a certain function and this can be achieved by using a label Using the label allows the code to change without affecting the batch file contents HEW 3 1 onwards also supports a number of easy ways to use label completion Each instance of the address edit field will have the labels button attached to it This allows you to click and browse the current labels list The dialog below also shows an example of a label pick list This stores the last twenty entries made into address fields throughout the entire HEW application This means if you are entering a label multiple times it should be much faster and efficient if you use this recently used address field list This control is available for all instances of
92. 5 12 Executing your program This section describes how you can execute your program s code You will learn how to do this by either running your program continuously or stepping single or multiple instructions at a time 15 12 1 Continuing run When your program is stopped and the debugger is in Break Mode the HEW will display a yellow arrow G in the gutter of the line in the Editor and Disassembly views that correspond to the CPU s current Program Counter PC address value This will be the next instruction to be executed if you perform a step or continue running To continue running from the current PC address e Click the Continue toolbar button BI OR e Choose the Debug Go menu option 15 12 2 Running from reset To reset your user system and run your program from the Reset Vector address choose the Debug Reset Go menu option or click the Reset Go toolbar button BN The program will run until it hits a breakpoint or a break condition is met You can stop the program manually at any time by choosing the Debug Halt Program menu option or by clicking the Halt Program toolbar button Note The program will start running from whatever address is stored in the Reset Vector location Therefore it is important to make sure that this location contains the address of your startup code 199 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 12 3 Running to cursor Sometimes as you are going through your application you may only w
93. AB CRH SAM rega szregD MAB CRALSAM re g4 re gO MAB CAH FAM re g5 zre gD WAB CALF AM dep zreaMiSsTPCRAH F 0 Fega OMANERA id DMAN ERA ttoo B A H drmawer_bttields Register name Address Sie Abaclute address flag Format Bites dire er bittelds boxy EA biti EOB bt2 VWV E14 bt3 VVYE1B Bites Defin tien 250 2CENESAS 6 Symbol File Format 6 Symbol File Format In order for HEW to be able to understand and decode the symbol file correctly the file must be formatted as a Pentica B file 1 The file must be a plain ASCII text file 2 The file must start with the word BEGIN 3 Each symbol must be on a separate line with the value first in hexadecimal terminated by an H followed by a space then the symbol text 4 The file must end with the word END Example BEGIN 11FAH Symbol name 1 11FCH Symbol name 2 11FEH Symbol name 3 1200H Symbol name 4 END Note Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 251 2CENESAS 6 Symbol File Format 252 2CENESAS 7 Keyboard Shortcuts 7 Keyboard Shortcuts All major commands in the HEW application can be driven by the keyboard Below is a list of all keyboard commands in the application Function key Key Function CTRL 0 9 Reserved for use for template insertion ALT K Open workspace window ALT U Open output window ALT F4 Exit the application ALT BACKSPACE Undo alternative in the editor
94. Dependencies Navigation Tab Templates Tab Projects Tab TA Projects E Templates al Navigator The Projects tab shows the current workspace projects and files You can quickly open any project file or dependent file by double clicking on its icon See 2 2 Configuring the workspace window Projects tab for more information on the Workspace window The Templates tab displays template settings See 4 13 Templates for more information about a template The Navigation tab provides jumps to various textual constructs within your project s files What is actually displayed within the Navigation tab depends upon what components are currently installed The figure below shows ANSI C functions See chapter 12 Navigation facilities for more information about a navigation Workspace ee x a Projects E Templates 2 Navigation To allow the Workspace window or the Output window docking Right click anywhere inside the Workspace window or the Output window Then a pop up menu will be displayed If the Allow Docking option is checked docking is allowed Otherwise docking is not allowed Select the Allow Docking option to check or uncheck it CENESAS 1 Overview When the Allow Docking option is checked you can dock a window toolbar or menu bar to the edge of the HEW main window or to the edge of another docked window You can also float them above the other HEW windows or outside t
95. Dependencies E he libh builtirh lowsreh machineh mathh E sbrk h smachineh Z stackscth E stddeth stdioh stdlibh stringh umachineh vecth ey Dependencies oo E lowerc h Z sbrk h stackscth vecth Show File Paths By default any files will not be shown with their full path as in figure k below If the Show file paths checkbox is selected all of the files in the Projects tab of the Workspace window are shown with their full path i e from a drive letter as in figure kk below kk Fl C source file Aaa C source file n E dbscte ow E CAHE W DemosDemosdbsct e When Sort files in time order option is selected the workspace window is then sorted into file time stamp order The newest files are located at the top of list with the older files towards the bottom If files are updated after selecting this option manually update the order of these files To manually update the file order Select Refresh Order in the pop up menu on the Projects tab of the Workspace window 31 2CENESAS 2 Build basics 2 10 Inserting a project into the workspace When a workspace is created it contains only one project but after it is created you can insert new or existing projects into the workspace To insert a new project into the workspace f Select the Project gt Insert Project
96. Display Selecting Reset Zoom from the pop up menu displays the waveforms in its original size 15 5 7 Setting the Zoom Magnification In the Zoom Magnification submenu of the pop up menu the zoom magnification can be selected from 2 4 or 8 15 5 8 Setting the Horizontal Scale In the Scale submenu of the pop up menu the size of the X axis can be selected from 128 256 or 512 pixels 15 5 9 Non Display of Cursor Selecting Clear Cursor from the pop up menu hides the cursor display 15 5 10 Displaying the Sampling Information Selecting Sample Information from the pop up menu displays the Sample Information dialog box 190 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger sample Information Data Size obit Channel o Mong a Displays the sampling information of the cursor location in the Waveform View window The following information is displayed Value Data Size Displays 8bit or 16bit Channel Displays the data channel Value X Displays the X axis of cursor location Y Displays the Y axis of cursor location displays Y axes for both the upper and lower plots when Stereo is selected 15 6 Viewing the IO memory As well as a CPU and ROM RAM a micro controller also contains on chip peripheral modules The exact number and type of peripheral modules differ between devices but typical modules are DMA controllers serial communications interfaces A D converters integrated timer units a
97. ESAS 11 To Build in Toolchain for HEW 1 x 11 To Build in Toolchain for HEW1 x When a project created in HEW1 x is used without upgrading to new toolchain that has been registered in HEW2 x onwards the toolchain for the old version must be registered Select the hrf file for the old toolchain with the Register button by selecting Tools gt Administration Build can be executed on HEW2 x onwards by using the old toolchain However note that a workspace which has been opened in HEW2 x onwards cannot be opened in HEW1 x In HEW2 x onwards a new project for the old version cannot be created When a project for the old version in HEW1 x is created use HEW 1 x iSelect HE Registration File Look in fyb 04 File name sh_60a0 Files of type HEW Registration Files hrf Cancel ee 261 CENESAS 11 To Build in Toolchain for HEW 1 x 262 2CENESAS 12 HMAKE User Guide 12 HMAKE User Guide 12 1 Command Line The following section describes the command line that should be used to execute the hmake program on a file using none or more of the available options Basic structure The command line must be of the following syntax hmake lt make file you wish to execute gt lt parameter list gt If a file is specified without an extension then mak will be appended to it The parameter list may include none or more of the parameters listed in the following section The pa
98. Executing a Command Pile sisicsacacsaxnaesesannacsinernadseaaanadagaasnadsedapadsiedasewaanadesncsmsdseaeavadabectnne aa 142 14 4 Stopping Command Execution ccccccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 143 453 Speciymg a Log ce e On oe one ee ners E ESOT on emE NEL NE a 143 14 6 Starting or Stopping Logging vp ccsaccicarestezeccdsscquasostedecsincadnatestersesdsseiuatovtedecdenccinetavieiaesasiequateviedees 143 14 7 Entering a Full Path to the File ceccessessssssesesssseeeeeseeseeeseeeeeesseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaas 143 14 8 Pasting a Placeholder sscsserenernin eesin aTa Eea e ENE EEEE EA EAN EE AAS ANNATA 143 ES a e A e E A E E O E E E E A A EE T 144 WO LO a EEE AE AE E EE 144 V Table Of Contents 14 11 PAS UG IEEE E IE E TE E PEI A E E A E ETE T 144 15 Using th Debugger Ga ne nee in nises ne ENEE AEEA EEEE EENE 145 ES Preparations for Ae Wi tO sirirssireihirenesin eniin n Eie Ea a EEE nE RETORNE RE EET 145 15 11 Compiling for debug essirrsiineniraicni nne e EEE Ee EEE aai aai aa kiaad 145 15 1 2 Selecting a debugging platform 0000000nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsunennessrresrerereererrrererrerrrrrrerrrerrererereeeeerens 146 15 13 Editing Project Comic rain ocd vansicsczsecennarestietnacsuceivasapescavseiuatovdntentsncaiea aT E 156 15 1 4 Configuring the debugging platform cc ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 157 15 1 5 Debugger sessions o
99. I 4 7 z aD E T ASCII a oogonio FE 6 USF ISF 00 00 00 00 a0 00 00 OO OO OO OO OO Le ooon 00 OO OO OO OO OO D0 t OOo o t t m0 00 D0 eee poooz0 00 OO OO OO OO OO 00 OO 00 00 Oo 00 Oo gonis oo 00 OO OO OO OO OO 00 00 oC oooi 00 00 OO OO OO OO OO d 00 00 Oo 0O0o6o oo 00 OO OO OO OO OO d 00 00 TE 4 re Label display area l Data display area Code display area Address display ara Register display area e n shows memory data read from Address and n means the offset value from the first address of the row e Code shows the code names e Register shows the name of the register allocated to the first address of the memory data displayed on this row e In place edit in the address display area data display area code display area e Double clicking the address display area label display area open a dialog which allows you to change the display start address e A dialog which allows you to change the memory data at the clicked address by double clicking the data display area code data display area Option Clicking the right hand mouse button displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar ar
100. If available the window title displays the current batch and log file names separated by colons e Pressing the Ctrl or Ctrl 4 keys on the last line displays the previously executed command line e The HEW command and TCL commands can be input in this window Option Clicking the right hand mouse button displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area 141 2CENESAS 14 Using the Command Line Pop up menu options Toolbar bottom Function Set Batch File Bat Specifying a command file Play Executing a command file Stop Stopping command execution Set Log File bod Specifying a log file Logging j Starting or stopping logging Browse Entering a full path to the file Placeholder Configuration directory Configuration Directory Pasting CONFIGDIR placeholder Configuration name Pasting CONFIGNAME placeholder Project directory Pasting PROJDIR placeholder Project name Pasting PROJECTNAME placeholder Workspace directory Pasting WORKSPDIR placeholder Workspace name Pasting WORKSPNAME placeholder HEW Installation directory Pasting HEWDIR placeholder Select All Selects i e highlights the entire E contents of the active window Copy Ei Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Paste F Copi
101. LAG I RM1 RAO T 0 0 1 15 7 5 Choosing a Register to be Displayed To choose a register to be displayed in the Register window choose Settings menu from the register pop up menu This dialog box is shown in following figure Settings kd Registers l Select all RIO IMACH sie WAT if MAAC False W PF iw 1S IM 57 WATA WJS PE iv 5 iw AOL BANE iw PLC iw AT_ BANE WSR WA BANK ivf GB iv AS BANK if BF WA 4 BANK Unselect all Cancel eel ale A MASE IS e T MASE 2 We FR A AS WSZ MASE I0 196 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 7 6 Modifying Register Contents To change register contents follow the procedure below Enter a value in the Value field of the register you want to change MDORBBL To change a register s contents open the Set Value dialog by selecting one of the following operations e Double click the register you want to change OR e Select the register you want to change and choose the Edit option from the pop up menu PO Set Walue Value Radix Hex T Set As whole Reeister z TEN You can enter a number or C C expression in the Value field You can choose the radix from the Radix drop down list box You can choose whether to modify the entire contents of the register a masked area floating bits or flag bits by selecting an option from the Set As drop down list box the contents of this
102. MAKE exe and is located in the HEW installation directory HEWDIR 5 Click the Use makefile build system check box This tells the HEW that when the build button is clicked that makefile should be executed rather than the internal build 6 Setup the makefile path This defaults to the location which HEW will generate makefiles to This item is configuration based so you can have a different makefile for each configuration Note You do not need to use a makefile generated by HEW It can be any format as long as your make tool supports it 7 Setup the makefile options HMAKE allows the user to specify project or configuration selection options so that different builds can be launched from the same file Again this item is configuration based so you can have a different makefile options for each configuration 8 The final option is the generate make file before build This will launch the default make file creation utility before the makefile is executed This means the makefile will always be up to date with the HEW project system 9 Click OK to save the changes Haketile Guild Command excluding parameters SH EWDOIAShmake exe Browse W Use makefile build system Maketile options gt Makefile path stwORKS POIR hmakes PROJECT MAME mak Browse W Generate makefile before build commences Once this system is setup the build button menu and keyboard shortcuts are linked to the makefile too
103. MOVE FILE REM SAVE SESSION SE SAVE WORKSPACE SW TOOL INFORMATION TO Contents Adds a file to the current project Sets the configuration to the specified configuration name Sets the specified project file as the current project Sets the specified session as the current session Closes the specified workspace file Evaluates an expression Opens the specified workspace file Exits HEW Sets default input radix Removes a file from the current project Saves the current session Saves the current workspace Outputs the tool information Build Commands Available only when there is a toolchain installed Command Name Short Name BUILD BU BUILD ALL BL GENERATE MAKE FILE GM UPDATE ALL DEPENDENCIES UD Command Line Operating Commands Command Name Short Name ASSERT AUTO COMPLETE AC ERASE ER HELP HE LOG LO SLEEP SUBMIT SU TCL Contents Performs a build on the current project Performs a build all on the current project Generates a build makefile for the current workspace Updates the current projects build dependencies Contents Comment Checks if an expression is true or false Switches the auto completion Clears the Command Line window Displays help for Command Line or help on a command Controls command output logging Delays command execution Executes a file of commands Turns TCL commands on or off 241 2CENESAS 2 List of Commands Execution Commands Available when the debugger is connected Command Name Short Nam
104. R Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then press CTRL F4 OR Ensure that the window that you want to close is the active window and then select the File Close menu option To close all files Select the Window Close All menu option 4 5 Editing a File The HEW editor s standard editing functionality is available through the usual methods 1 e the menu toolbar and keyboard shortcuts and is additionally supported via a pop up menu that is local to each Editor window Right click in an open Editor window to invoke the pop up menu The table below outlines the basic operations that are provided by the editor Operation Effect Undo Reverses the last editing operation Redo Repeats the last undone editing operation Cut Removes highlighted text and places it on the Windows clipboard Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Paste Copies the contents of the Windows clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor Clear Removes highlighted text it is not copied to the Windows clipboard Select All Selects i e highlights the entire contents of the active window 2CENESAS Action Select Edit gt Undo Press CTRL Z Select Edit gt Redo Press CTRL Y Click the Cut toolbar button de Select Edit gt Cut Select Cut from the pop up menu Press CTRL X Click the Copy toolbar button Select Edit gt Copy
105. R e Right click on the open brace to match from and select the Match Braces menu option from the pop up menu To check the structure of an entire file place the cursor at its start and then repeatedly invoke the match brace operation The editor will successively highlight each pair of braces in turn until there are no more left to match 4 15 Editor Column management The editor in HEW has the ability to manage columns apart from the main editor column These can be added and used by any component in the HEW system Examples of this functionality might include a hardware breakpoint column added by the target or possibly an address information column added by the debugger The global column states feature is also accessible from the main edit menu To switch off a column in all source files 1 Right click in the Editor window 2 Click the Define Column Format menu item The Global Editor Column States dialog will be displayed 3 Ifthe column s checkbox is checked then the column is enabled if the column s checkbox is gray then this means that the column is enabled in some files and disabled in others 4 Click the OK button for the new column settings to take effect 72 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor Global Editor Column States a Line Number SAW Breakpoints WS Aw Breakponts ASM Cancel Source Address To switch off a column in one source file l Right click in the Editor window
106. REJ10J0886 0100Z Everywhere you imagine E gt E NI ESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 00 User s Manual Renesas Microcomputer Development Environment System Rev 1 00 Jan 19 2005 Renesas lechnology WWW FENESAS COM Keep safety first in your circuit designs 1 Renesas Technology Corp puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury fire or property damage Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs with ap propriate measures such as i placement of substitutive auxiliary circuits ii use of non flammable material or ili prevention against any malfunction or mishap Notes regarding these materials 1 These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corp product best suited to the customer s application they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights or any other rights belonging to Renesas Technology Corp or a third party 2 Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage or infringement of any third party s rights originating in the use of any product data diagrams charts pro grams algorithms or circuit application examples contained in these materials 3 All information contained in the
107. STEP No activities must STEP manually by User BREAK Still executing if previously executing User Target Program BREAK by breakpoints illegal access or due to illegal User Program Still executing if previously executing User Target Program RESET CPU No activities Target Debugger Session 2 No activities GO can only be executed manually by User GO No activities must STEP manually by User STEP Still executing if previously executing User Target Program BREAK Still executing if previously executing User Target Program BREAK by breakpoints illegal access or due to illegal User Program No activities RESET CPU Another difference to the standard debugging system is that it is possible to view the download modules in the workspace window for all synchronized sessions This allows modules to be downloaded for any of the available sessions easily 15 18 Existing HEW functions dependent on the debugger 15 18 1 Looking at labels In addition to the debugging information that the HEW uses to link your program s source code to the actual code in memory the debug object file also contains symbolic information This is a table of text names that represent an address in the program and are referred to as labels in HEW In the Disassembly view you will see the first eight characters of the label in place of the corresponding address and as part of an inst
108. Save As Page Setup Print Recent Files Recent Workspaces Exit 1 Keyboard Shortcuts Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl F4 Ctrl S Ctrl Shift S Ctrl P List of Menus Toolbar Button D 2CENESAS 1 List of Menus Function Creates a new document Opens an existing document Closes the active document Creates a new workspace Opens an existing workspace Saves the current workspace Closes the current workspace Creates a new session Import an existing session Save the current session Save the current session with a new session name Reload the session file for the current session Save the active document Save all modified documents in the workspace Save the active document with a new file name Change the printing options Prints the active document Open this document Open this workspace Exit HEW 231 1 List of Menus 1 2 List of Edit Menu Menu Menu Option Edit Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Clear Select All Find Find In Files Replace Goto Line Match Braces Bookmarks Toggle Bookmark Next Bookmark Previous Bookmark Clear All Bookmarks Templates Define Templates Insert Template Toggle Breakpoint Enable Disable Breakpoint Define Column Format Source Breakpoints Evaluate 232 Keyboard Shortcuts Ctrl Z Ctrl Y Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Delete Ctrl A Ctrl F F4 Ctrl H Ctrl G Shift Ctrl M Ctr1 F2 F2
109. Scope Toolbar All Each workspace Command All The whole system Menu Application wide tools The whole system Workspace wide tools Each workspace Placeholders Application wide custom placeholder The whole system Workspace wide placeholder Each workspace Debugger Debugger tool Each project Debugger location Default whole system and each project basis Command line options Each project Session file Each project Download module Each project Log All Each workspace Help All Each workspace Keyboard All The whole system 6 7 2 Scope of a Control in the Options Dialog Box Scope of each control of each tab of the Options dialog box which is launched via Setup gt Options affects the whole system 97 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 6 8 Specifying workspace options The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to control several aspects of a workspace via the Setup Options dialog To invoke it select the Setup Options menu option and select the Workspace tab 6 8 1 Open last workspace at start up When you exit the High performance Embedded Workshop the last workspace you had open is stored On subsequently launching the HEW you may want the last workspace to be opened automatically To open the last workspace at start up 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Setup Options dialog will be displayed Select the Workspace tab 2 Set the Open last workspace at start up checkbox if you would li
110. T_OFFSET Navigation entries Navigation category Class ve ag GetllassN arme yoid Clase members 2 heg mm niLiven ater CGreatwhite i CGreatwhitel E CGreatwhitel Projects Ternplates Navigation The Navigation tab of the workspace window contains categories for all supported navigation types In HEW the following navigation components are supported as standard Navigation Type Category Function C Defines All defines for C and C source files are displayed C Functions All ANSI C standard functions are for C source files displayed C Class All classes functions and members are displayed for C source files Each category is displayed in the top level of the view Underneath each category the items belonging to the active project are displayed It is possible to disable scanning for certain navigation categories if you do not require the information To switch off a navigation category 1 If you right click anywhere inside the Navigation tab a pop up menu will be invoked 2 Select the Select Categories menu item 3 The Select Categories dialog is displayed Select Categories Please select the categories to scan for C Defines WC Functions Cancel W C Classes 4 Uncheck any categories you are not interested in seeing definitions for 5 Click OK 133 CENESAS 12 Navigation Facilities To update the navigation view 1 If you right click anywhere
111. To forcibly terminate a task Select the Build Terminate Current Tool menu option The HEW will attempt to stop the tool immediately Note Do NOT assume that any output from the tool you terminated is valid It is recommended that you delete any output files produced and ensure that the phase is executed again 2 4 Building multiple projects The High performance Embedded Workshop lets you build multiple projects and configurations at once To build multiple projects 1 Select the Build gt Build Multiple menu option 2 The Build Multiple dialog box gives you the choice of which projects and configurations to build Select the check boxes next to the projects and configurations that you want to build For example in figure below if you wanted to build the entire hewtest2 project you would check the hewtest2 Debug and the hewtest2 Release selections and leave all other check boxes unchecked Build Multiple jhewtest Release hewtest Debue jhewtest Release Build All hewteste Debue ae hewtesti Release Jhewtestd Debug _hewtest4 Debug Jhewtestt Releaze 3 When you are happy with your chosen selection click the Build button and the HEW will build the selected projects and configurations 27 2CENESAS 2 Build basics 4 Ifyou want to build all of the projects click the Build All button This will automatically select all projects and configurations an
112. _sthName variable e Globals Global variables Ha amp heap_area and functions folder giens aj brk sE INT Vector Ei SSS Projects Ternplates Navigation The C navigation view uses a number of icons to describe the type of function or variable the icon belongs too These are listed in the table below Public member function Protected member tunction Private member function Public member variable om Protected member variable Private member vanable Double clicking on a navigation item by default jumps you to the associated navigation items declaration This default behavior can be modified by selecting Jump to definition on double click from the pop up menu this option is unchecked at default When this option is checked double clicking a navigation item jumps you to the associated navigation items definition To jump to the definition Select either of the following ways e Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu and check that Jump to definition on double click is checked Double click a navigation item on the Navigation tab e Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu Select Jump to definition 135 2CENESAS 12 Navigation Facilities To jump to the declaration Select either of the following ways e Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu and check that Jump to defini
113. a an 19 54 AMC ESC aria Componse E ENE ENA ENE ES NE E 80 5 5 Viewing and Editing Component Properties 0 0 ccccccccscssceccccceccececcceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseseeeeess 81 5 6 Uninstalling a cCOMpONENt eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeesssesesesssessssssssssssssssssssesseessssesssssssesssessssasesasasaaaaaas 82 a7 Technical KOPNO eee eee teen ete eee ee nate ne ote nme re Sete net tt Sennen Tt eet Renee tt Sete 84 5 8 Using On Demand component ccccceeeeeeesesseseeseeessessesesssssssssessssseeessasssssssssessessssaesassaaaaas 86 5 9 Custom PEO JC CU Wy CS eraann nae AEE sata tees wasn se AEA EEEE EEA REA 87 iii Table Of Contents 6 Customizing the Environment ccccccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 89 6 1 Customizing the toolbars ccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 89 6 2 Customizing the TOO IS TACT segnis eniin nTa Ea eieae E enean NEEE 91 6 3 Using Custom Placeholder ic acc lt assasnsceasdeancassaanectaaddhe caascanscaaadaacdansaaatesdeacosssacscssassncdosssacnassastenss 93 6 4 Using the workspace and project log facilities cccccceeeeeesseeseesesssssssessssssssssssssssssesseesaaaas 94 6 5 COMTI UES TS DEI Systeri E E E RETE aiT AR 94 6 6 Keyboard shortcut customization ccccceeceessssssssssssssssssssssssessssssssesssssssssssseesssssssssaaaeeeeeaaags 95 6 7 Scop
114. a file Find h Searching for a label Fine Next Fia Searching for the next label View Source E Viewing the source corresponding to a label Print E Prints the currently displayed contents Toolbar display Showing hiding toolbar buttons Customize toolbar Customizing toolbar buttons 212 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 2 Adding a Label Choose Add from the pop up menu and open the Add Label dialog box to add a label Hdd Label Ei E3 we o Address 00000000 Cancel Enter the new label name into the Name field and the corresponding value into the Address field and press OK The Add Label dialog box closes and the label list is updated to show the new label When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 15 18 2 1 Supporting duplicate labels 3 Editing a Label Choose Edit from the pop up menu and open the Edit Label dialog box to edit a label Edit Label head Address OOF F420 E Cancel Edit the label name and value as required and then press OK to save the modified version in the label list The list display is updated to show the new label details When an overloaded function or a class name is entered in the Address field the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function For details refer to section 15 18 2 1 Supporting dupli
115. a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Options Function Remove Folder Remove folder Rename Folder Rename folder Configure View Configuring the workspace view Select a project file on the Projects tab of the workspace window and click the right mouse button This opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Options Function Open Open the selected file Build Build the selected file Build Options Set build options Add File Add file to a project Remove File Remove file from project Exclude Build Excluding a project file from build OR OR Include Build Including a project file in build Version Control Executing version control tool Configure View Configuring the workspace view Show Differences Compare files Properties Display file properties Select a download module on the Projects tab of the workspace window and click the right mouse button This opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Options Function Download module Download module Download module debug data only Download module debug data only Unload module Unload module Configure View Configuring the workspace view For details on Active project Load project and Unload project refer to section 2 11 Setting the current project 15 2CENESAS 2 Build basics 2 3 Project files In order for the HEW to be able to build your application you must first tell it which files should be in the proj
116. a workspace The following sections describe how you can associate Visual SourceSafe with your current workspace 9 1 1 Selecting Visual SourceSafe First you need to select Visual SourceSafe as the version control system To use Visual SourceSafe 5 0 or 6 0 1 Select the Tools Version Control Select menu option The Select Version Control System dialog will be displayed which lists all of the supported version control systems 2 Select the Visual SourceSafe 5 0 6 0 entry from the Version Control Systems list and click the Select button Click the OK button to confirm the selection The SourceSafe Login dialog is displayed 4 Enter your Visual SourceSafe username into the Username field and password into the Password field 5 Enter into Database path the full path to the Visual SourceSafe database i e SRCSAFE INT into which you would like to add this project Alternatively you can locate the folder graphically by clicking the Browse button Click the OK button The Create SourceSafe Project dialog is invoked The Project name field displays the name of the project i e folder to be created in the database If necessary you can change this name to another 8 The tree underneath the Project name field shows the structure of the database specified in Step 5 Select the folder into which you would like to create the folder specified in Project name 9 Click the OK button 10 HEW w
117. address entered value Drag amp Drop Type of dropped data Operation Selected range on the Memory Window s Data area Copy the contents of a selected range of data to an area starting from the dropped position 15 3 6 Comparing the Memory Contents The contents of two memory blocks can be compared Select a source address range in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Compare option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Compare Memory dialog box 1s displayed Compare Memory Start Address foono00 Enel ees O000F F Compare Address DataLeneth i byte x Cancel Enter the start address of the destination memory area in the Compare Address field and the data length in the Data Length field If you did not drag the comparison source address range you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value If there is a mismatch the address where it was found is displayed in a message box Note Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 177 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 3 7 Testing an Area of Memory You can test an area of memory in the address space using the Memory Test feature Select an address range to test in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Test option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Test Memory di
118. ake components This version of HEW also supports the integration of the generated makefile and tools into the HEW framework This allows you to click build menu or toolbar button and then launch the makefile rather than the normal internal HEW build process For further information see section 3 10 Using a makefile inside the HEW system To generate a makefile 1 Ensure that the project that you want to generate a makefile for is the current project 2 Ensure that the build configuration that you want to build the project with is the current configuration Select the Build Generate Makefile menu option 4 Once this menu has been selected a dialog is displayed which asks the user what parts of the workspace need to be added to the makefile Select the radio button that is relevant for your makefile 5 Ensure you have selected the correct makefile format HEW is capable of generating GNUMake HMake and NMake compatible files 6 The use static sub command files check box will generate separate command files in the make destination directory This is different to the normal style where the sub command files are generated by the make tool In the case of the GNUMake file format this must be switched on 7 Checking Scan dependencies whilst building makefile will force a dependency scan to ensure the makefile creation is up to date 8 Click OK 50 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features Generate Makefile Ed Genera
119. akpoints and bookmark Setting PC breakpoint by double click Containing color syntax highlighted code Clicking the right hand mouse button displays a pop up menu containing available options Function Build the selected files Removes highlighted text and places it on the Windows clipboard Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Copies the contents of the Windows clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor Add file to a project Find text in the current file Find text in multiple files Replace text in the current file Jump to a line in a file Find a matching brace Sets a bookmark at the current line or clears a bookmark at the current line Jumps to the next bookmark in the current file from the current line Jumps to the previous bookmark in the current file from the current line Clears all bookmarks in the current file Defines a template Inserts a template Build File Cut Copy Paste Add File To Project Find Find in Files Replace Goto Line Match Braces Bookmarks Toggle Bookmark Next Bookmark Previous Bookmark Clear All Bookmarks Templates Define Templates Insert Template Toggle Breakpoint Enable Disable Breakpoint Define Column Format Columns Column name Instant Watch 1 Go To Cursor Set PC Here Display PC View Disassembly Sets or clears a software breakpoint at the line showing the add
120. alog box is displayed Test ele mors Start Address pooo Bll satel addes o000F F Cancel If you did not drag the address range to be tested you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value Note The exact test is target dependent However in all cases the current contents of the memory will be overwritten YOUR PROGRAM OR DATA WILL BE ERASED Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 15 3 8 Saving Memory Contents in a Text File You can save an area of memory in the address space to a text file using the Save Memory Contents feature Select an address range to save in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Save Memory contents option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Save memory contents dialog box is displayed Select the output range in Memory Save Area data format in Data Length number of digits in Column radix in Radix and code in Code It is possible to select showing hiding of the label display area and register display area by Output the label column and Output the register column respectively If you did not drag the address range to be saved you must enter the output range Save memory contents Firs Save jn E SH4demo d ft i be File name oo Save as type TextFiles tt H Cancel Memory Save Area Joo
121. alue Value and assigned location The assigned location is enclosed by Type Type of the variable The R mark shows that the value of the variable can be updated during user program execution When the color of the R mark is black a value is real time updated Option Clicking the right hand mouse button displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Toolbar bottom Function Auto Update R Marks the selected variable with a bold R and updates the variable in real time Auto Update All Marks all variables with bold Rs and updates all variables in real time Delete Auto Update Marks the selected variable with an outlined R and cancels realtime update Delete Auto Update All Marks all variables with outlined Rs and cancels realtime update Add Watch EH Launches the Add Watch dialog box allowing the user to enter a variable or expression to be watched Edit Value a Launches the Edit Watch dialog box allowing the user to change the variable s value Delete x Removes the variable indicated by the text cursor from the Watch window Delete All F Removes all the variables from the Watch window Radix Hexadecimal 16 Display in hexadecimal Decimal 10 Display in decimal Octal a Display in octal Binary 7 D
122. ances in which human life is potentially at stake Please contact Renesas Technology Corp or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes such as apparatus or systems for transportation vehicular medical aerospace nuclear or undersea repeater use 6 The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corp is necessary to reprint or repro duce in whole or in part these materials 7 lf these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be im ported into a country other than the approved destination Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and or the country of destination is prohibited 8 Please contact Renesas Technology Corp for further details on these materials or the products contained therein Introduction The High performance Embedded Workshop 1s a powerful development environment for embedded applications targeted at Renesas micro controllers The main features are e A configurable build engine that allows you to set up compiler assembler and linker options by using GUI An integrated text editor with user customizable syntax coloring to improve code readability A configurable environment which allows you to run your own tools An integrated debugger which allows you t
123. and the Reset button will change to a Delete button Click the Delete button To reset a standard toolbar back to its original state 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog will be displayed 2 Select the standard toolbar from the Toolbars list and then click the Reset button To show or hide toolbar tooltips 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog will be displayed 2 Set the Show Tooltips checkbox as desired 90 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 6 2 Customizing the tools menu The Tools menu can be customized to include your own menu options To add a new menu option l ey eee a Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog will be displayed Select the Menu tab The first thing you need to decide is whether you are adding a global application wide tool which will be available to all of your workspaces or whether you wish to add a workspace wide tool which is only valid for the current workspace Once you have chosen choose the relevant section of the dialog Menu Application wide tools Modit Remove i workspace wide tools Add Madiiy Remove ji Click the Add button The Add Tool dialog will be invoked If you would like to add an existing system tool to the menu then select the Select from existing tools radio button choose the tool from the
124. ant to run a small section of code that would require many single steps to execute In this case it would be useful to be able to run to a particular point You can do this by using the Go To Cursor feature How to use the Go To Cursor feature 1 Make sure that a Source or Disassembly view is open showing the address at which you wish to stop 2 Position the text cursor on the address at which you wish to stop by either clicking in the Address field or using the cursor keys 3 Choose the Go To Cursor option from the pop up menu The debugging platform will run your code from the current PC value until it reaches the address indicated by the cursor s position Notes e If your program never executes the code at this address the program will not stop If this happens you can stop code execution by pressing ESC choosing the Debug Halt Program menu option or clicking the Halt Program toolbar button D e The Go To Cursor feature requires a temporary breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work and the menu option will be disabled 15 12 4 Running from a Specified Address The Run Program dialog box allows the user to run the program from any address Choose Debug gt Run to open the Run Program dialog box Run Program ea Program counter Janoooo00 Temporary PC breakpoints Reset go Cancel The following execution conditions can be specified in this d
125. ar This toolbar is only available when a version control tool is being used in the current project Check Out Files Remove Files Check In Files Add Files Get Files Status Df Files Ph ho o A a When the Standard toolbar is docked it has a Control bar as shown in the figure below If you want to move the docked Standard toolbar click and drag its Control bar to the new location The figure below shows the Standard toolbar when it is docked and also when it is floating on Control bar Docked Toolbar Standard Fa Floating Toolbar To dock a toolbar Select one of the following operations e Double click on the title bar of a floating toolbar OR e Drag the title bar of a floating toolbar and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar toolbar or the HEW main frame on whose edge you would like to dock the window until the shape of the floating bar changes To float a toolbar Select one of the following operations e Double click on the control bar of a docked toolbar OR e Drag the control bar of a docked toolbar and draw it away from the edge of the HEW main frame and from an edge of the other docked windows menu bar or toolbars 2CENESAS 1 Overview 1 2 4 Workspace window The Workspace window has three panes a Workspace Fey Demo E Demo a Assembly source file De mo c resetpre c oe yectthlc oe dbsctc vee Int prec 3 lowsre c sbrk c Download modules
126. aracters are listed in the table below and explained underneath Character and and and Function Matches one or more occurrences of the preceding item except in a bracket expression For example a matches a aa aaa and so on Matches zero or more occurrences of the preceding item except in a bracket expression For example a matches the empty string a aa and so on Matches zero or one occurrence s of the preceding item except in a bracket expression For example a matches the empty string and a Specify a cardinality range formed as follows m n This construct matches between m and n occurrences of the preceding item For example a 2 3 matches aa and aaa This construct can also be formed using m and m The first matches m or more occurrences of the preceding item For example a 2 matches aa aaa aaaa and so on The second matches exactly m occurrences of the preceding item For example a 2 matches aa Create a bracket expression Bracket expressions create a set of items any of which may be matched For example abc matches a or b or c Within a bracket expression all regular expression special characters are treated as normal non special characters except specifies a range of character values based on their bit pattern For example A Za z matches all uppercase and lowercase English characters To indicate as a character in the bracket expression it must be the first or last c
127. assembler and so on If an error is encountered in a source file then the error will be displayed in the build tab along with the source file name and line number To quickly locate a problem double click on the error to jump to the source file and line The Debug tab The Debug tab shows the output from any debugger process Any debug component that needs to display information will send its output to this window The Find in Files tab The Find in Files tab displays the results of the last Find in Files action To activate find in files select the Edit Find in Files menu option or click the Find In Files toolbar button For further details on using Find in Files see section 4 6 2 Finding text in multiple files The Version Control tab The Version Control tab displays the results of version control actions The tab is only displayed if a version control system is in use For further details on version control see chapter 7 Version control Press the Shift Esc key and the Output window closes 1 2 7 Status bar The status bar displays information about the current state of the HEW The figure below shows the status bar Displays HEW status messages Virtual desktop Attributes Line numberLines Insertion Overnyite mode AGU command description Num Lock Column number Caps Lock Ready fet Fe Fe EA Defauti desktop Read write 62 87 4 Ns NUM 4 2CENESAS 1 Overview 1 3 Help system The help menu is the righ
128. at you want to jump back to at a subsequent time One example of its use 1s in a large C file where you may want to set a bookmark on each function definition Once a bookmark has been set it exists until it is removed or the file is closed 62 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor To set a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the line to mark 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Toggle Bookmark toolbar button klel OR e Press CTRL E2 OR e Select the Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark menu option OR e Right click and select the Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark menu option from the pop up menu A bookmark icon J will be placed on the bookmarked line to indicate that it is an active bookmark To remove a bookmark 1 Place the insertion cursor on the marked line 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Toggle Bookmark toolbar button bll OR e Press CTRL E2 OR e Select the Edit gt Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark menu option OR e Right click and select the Bookmarks gt Toggle Bookmark menu option from the pop up menu The bookmark icon will be removed from the line To jump to the next bookmark in a file e Click the Next Bookmark toolbar button Gia OR e Press F2 OR e Select the Edit gt Bookmarks Next Bookmark menu option OR e Right click and select the Bookmarks Next Bookmark menu option from the pop up menu To jump to the previous bookmark in a file e Click
129. atus you would like to view in the Workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Status of Files toolbar button or select the Tools Version Control Status of Files menu option 3 Ifa file has a red tick next to it a user different to you has checked it out 9 2 7 Viewing the History of a File Visual SourceSafe controls the edits to the files in its projects and allows you to view the complete history of these edits right back to the time that the file was first added to the project To view the revision history of a file s in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s whose history you would like to view You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Select the Tools Version Control Show History menu option 122 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe 9 3 Visual SourceSafe Integration Options You can control the way in which the history and status commands are displayed by selecting the Tools gt Version Control Configure menu option To display the results of a history command in a dialog box then check the Display dialog box for history checkbox or clear it if you would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window To display the results of a status command in a dialog box check the Display dialog box for file status checkbox or clear it if you
130. ays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Toolbar bottom Function Compare cr This opens a new compare window so that some new files can be compared and the differences displayed Export results to file This opens a dialog which allows you to choose a file to export the current difference results to a textual format The ignore white space option which is on the advanced options dialog can be toggled via this menu item Displays a standard find dialog This uses the same find dialog as the HEW editor Finds the next previous string that meets the find requirements Ignore white space Find Find previous Find next Finds the next string that meets the find requirements Previous difference Automatically jumps the view to the next previous difference Next difference Automatically jumps the view to the next difference em opt Ea ee BoE Refresh comparison Refreshes the view to manually run the difference comparison again This can be used if either file has been modified since the last comparison Toolbar display Showing hiding toolbar buttons Customize toolbar Customizing toolbar buttons 132 CENESAS 12 Navigation Facilities 12 Navigation Facilities Workspace _ E Eo as a IN
131. build operation Select one of the following operations e Click the Build toolbar button hi e Press F7 OR e Select the Build gt Build menu option OR e Right click on a project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select the Build gt Build option from the pop up menu The Build All option compiles and assembles all source files irrespective of whether they have been modified or not and links all of the new object files produced To perform a build all operation Select one of the following operations e Click the Build All toolbar button El OR e Select the Build gt Build All menu option OR e Right click on a project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select the Build gt Build All option from the pop up menu All output from a build or build all operation is redirected to the Build tab of the Output window Both the Build and the Build All operations will terminate if any project files produce errors 26 2CENESAS 2 Build basics 2 7 3 Stopping a build The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to halt the build process once it is under way To stop a build 1 Select one of the following operations e Click the Stop Build toolbar button OR e Select the Build gt Stop Build menu option The build will stop after the current file phase has been built 2 Wait until the Build Stopped by User message appears in the Output window before continuing
132. buttons Customize toolbar Customizing toolbar buttons 223 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger b Editing a local Item s Value You may wish to change the value of a local variable e g for testing purposes or if the value is incorrect due to a bug in your program To change a watch item s value use the Edit Value function Editing a local item s value Enter a value directly in the window In another way select the item to edit by clicking on it you will see a flashing cursor on the item Choose Edit Value from the pop up menu The Edit Value dialog box opens Edit alue led E spressioni g Current Value H OOO0R7d4 73FFFFAC New Value Cancel Enter the new value or expression in the New Value field and click OK The Locals window is updated to show the new value c Modifying the Radix The radix for the selected variable display can be modified by choosing Radix from the pop up menu 224 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 225 2CENESAS 16 Technical Support 16 Technical Support 16 1 Check for Updates To check for HEW product updates or service packs 1 Select Help gt Technical support gt Check web site for updates 2 Your default web browser is invoked and defaults to the HEW download page for your region 3 Browse this area for HEW updates to fix bugs or add new features 16 2 Creating a Bug Report Occasionally you may experience some unforeseen problems with
133. c is not generated Vector Displays a description of the vector Note Since the generated reset program interrupt functions reset vector handlers and interrupt source register definitions are samples be sure to refer to the CPU hardware manual To move to Step 7 click the Next gt button in Step 6 151 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger New Project 7 9 Setting the Target System for Debugging CISH 4 Simulator Little endian SH 4 with Bs Simulator SH 4 with BSC Simulator Littl endian SH 405H7750R2 Simulator SH 45H7F7S0R2 Simulator Little endian Target type SH 4 r lt Back Met Finish Cancel 7 Specify the debugger targets in Step 7 Targets Sets the debugger targets Select by checking the debugger targets No selection or a selection of more than one target is possible Target Type Specifies the type of the targets displayed in Targets Note The endian type selected in step 2 will be applied to the compiler settings This is separate from the endian type of the debugger target selected in step 7 To move to Step 8 click the Next gt button in Step 7 152 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger New Project 8 9 Setting the Debugger Options Target name SH 4 Simulator Configuration name ti Debug oH 4 Detail options Simulator L O disable Simulator LO addr 0x4 Bus mode 0 Back met Finish Cancel 8 Set the opt
134. cate labels 4 Deleting a Label To delete a label select the label and choose Delete from the pop up menu A confirmation message box appears Confirmation Request g 4re you sure you want to delete the label main Don t ask this question again If you click OK the label is removed from the list and the window display is updated If the message box is not required then do not select the Delete Label option of the Confirmation sheet in the HEW Options dialog box 213 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 5 Deleting All Labels To delete all the labels from the list choose Delete All from the pop up menu A confirmation message box appears Confirmation Request p re vou sure you want to delete all labels Dont ask this question again If you click OK all the labels are removed from the HEW system s symbol table and the list display will be cleared If the message box is not required do not select the Delete All Labels option of the Confirmation sheet in the HEW Options dialog box 6 Loading Labels from a File A symbol file can be loaded and merged into the HEW s current symbol table Choose Load from the pop up menu to open the Load Symbols dialog box The dialog box operates like a standard Windows Open file dialog box select the file and click Open to start loading The standard file extension for symbol files is sym When the symb
135. cccceeeecceeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 187 15 4 3 Updating the Window Contents cccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 187 15 4 4 Displaying the Pixel Information ccccccccsesessseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 188 15 5 Displaying memory contents aS waveforms cccccceessessessesseseseeseeeeseeeeseeeeeseesssseeeeeeeeeeeeaas 188 15 5 1 Opening the Waveform View Window cccccccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 188 15 5 2 Automatically Updating the Window Content ccccccccccccecccecececeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 190 1533 Updating the Window Contents ccccccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 190 15534 08 111 01S 0 12 hi ee ee eee ne oe eee ee nee E EE eee re 190 15 53 Zo m Out I ay ieee eee ees 190 53 6 Resetting the Zoom Display vie cesicvessesscxssceenaresietnessnceiaciasdednerdeceenatesteiaeteieaterdaieacayseieatorentens 190 15 5 7 Setting the Zoom Magnification ccccccccccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 190 15 5 8 Setting the Horizontal Scale sacccssicacscvscsvsessecsecsscacsedencvssdacendesvsassecdeasecacsedesdacdiecsaxsassesseestacss 190 1539 ING DIS DAY OE CUES OL tc cdiecetincies edn czsreedinc iie E E ET TEETE REER TE n i nan 190 15 5 10 Displaying the Sampling InformatiOn ccccccsseees
136. ceeeeccceccecceeecececcccceaecceceeeeeeeseeeeees 101 09 External edil r escenes a E 101 6 10 Customizing the font in youf VIEWS sis sscrsiieririteinsriiiiineiininiininin iiin irinin Taa 102 6 11 Using the virtual desktop neneneennennnenenenenesessesssseseesnrsrereerererrerersrerrerrerrrererreererererereserererens 103 e a OMG E EE S E EE EE E E E EE EE E AE E EE O E E E E A E 105 7 1 Selecting a Version Control Syster sa ssssevesseecerecsesanvessersaden ordedeasseseinate eiin Ta r iniia 105 Using the Custom Version Control System cccccsccccccccecccecccceceeeeceeeceeeceeeceeeeceeceeeececeeeeeeeeeeees 107 8 1 Defining Version Control Menu Options cccccccccccccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeseeeseess 107 8 1 1 System menu options and toolbar buttons 0 0 0 0 cece cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 108 8 1 2 User Menu OpPHONS eeen naen ae EA AEE E EA A EEEE 109 8 2 Defining Version Control Commands eeeenuneuseenenesrrrerrerrrerrrrrrrrrrrerererersrsreserrerrrrerrrrrsreees 110 8 2 1 EXC CUIAB IG ie Urn CONE errara E E I E E EEA 111 8 3 Specifying Argument 0cccccsssssessssssssessesssessssseessesssessesseeessesseseeseeseeseseseeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 111 8 3 1 Specifyine File Locations sessiossa TERE e TEESE e EEANN 112 8 3 2 Specifying File Locations Example ccccsccscssessecseseeeeceeeeeeececeeeeeceeeceseceeeceeecessensssessens 113 8 3 3 PPecily
137. ceholder button A pop up menu will be displayed which lists all of the placeholders that are valid for the associated edit box 3 Select the desired placeholder from the pop up menu The equivalent placeholder will be inserted into the edit box Filename l Configuration directory Project directory Workepace directory HEW installation directory Workspace name Project name Configuration name Example 2 1 Select the required placeholder other than Custom directory from the drop down list box and specify a sub directory relative to the directory shown by the placeholder 2 Ifyou select Custom directory specify an absolute directory path in the Sub Directory field 245 2CENESAS 4 Placeholders Relative to Configuration directory Sub Direchory Example 3 1 Place the insertion cursor at the point you would like to insert the placeholder 2 Select the required placeholder from the drop down list box 3 Click the Insert button Placeholder Configuration directory Inzert Example 4 1 Alternatively if you know the placeholder already type it into the field directly Ensure that you type the placeholder name in uppercase and that it is preceded by and followed by This is correct FILEDIR These are incorrect S Filedir FILED R SFILEDIR 246 2CENESAS 4 3 Available Placeholders 4 Placeholders The table below lists the available placeh
138. change the target the following operations is necessary 1 Select the project that needs to be changed in the tree on the left of the dialog It defaults to the current project 2 Select the session which is to be modified in the drop list above the tree Change the target using the target drop list control This removes any target specific setup options that have been previously been set 4 Check for changed source files before download The HEW can check to see if any of the source files have changed before the download module is downloaded in the current project If files have been modified then a confirmation is launched which asks the user if they wish to rebuild the code before the download takes place 158 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Confirmation Request ma P The following download modules are out of date CAHE Yw orkspacesSH4demosS H 4demot D ebugsSH4demo abs Do you wish to build the SH4deno project Don t ask this question again Na Cancel This is a confirmation dialog so can be switched of if this feature is not desirable This is available from the Setup gt Options dialog on the Confirmation tab This is shown below iM Build out of date download modules 5 Setting the Downloading a Program Once you have made sure that there is memory in your system in which to download your code you can then proceed to download a program to debug The initial selection of download module is au
139. cies A typical project will contain dependencies between files For example a C file may include one or more header files In complex projects source files will include or depend upon others and this can quickly become difficult to manage However the HEW provides a dependency scanning mechanism whereby all files in a project are checked for dependencies Once complete the Projects tab of the Workspace window will display an up to date list with all the project file dependencies To update a project s dependencies e Select the Build gt Update All Dependencies menu option OR e Right click on a project in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and select the Build gt Update All Dependencies option from the pop up menu Initially the dependencies for all files are contained within the Dependencies folder although this can be modified by configuring the projects tab 29 CENESAS 2 Build basics ae Workspace OF x Ey Assembly source file aie lowlyl sre Et ra C source file ie E dbsct c nE Demo c s E intprg c l e lows E resetprg c n E sbrk c ee 2 vecttblc ay Dependencies l os B lower h sbrk h 3 ta stacksct h i vect TA Projects E Templates al Mawigation 2 9 Configuring the workspace window If you right click anywhere inside the Projects tab of the Workspace window a pop up menu will be invoked Select the Configure View menu option to modify the way in w
140. cognized file type in the Workspace window the open operation is passed to the Windows operating system instead of opening the file in the editor The default Open operation is then carried out as if the file was double clicked in Windows Explorer To view the currently defined extensions use the File Extensions dialog box See section 2 4 File extensions and file groups for further information 16 2CENESAS 2 Build basics You can make the file a Relative project file if you click the Relative Path check box on the bottom of Add File s dialog box This makes the project files relative and can be located outside of the workspace structure Then if the entire source tree is relocated the HEW checks the relative location for the file and can still find the files By default in this option is checked 2 3 2 Removing files from a project There are three ways of removing files from a project e Files can be individually removed from a project e A selection of files can be removed e All files can be removed To remove a file s from a project 1 Select the Project gt Remove Files menu option or select the Remove Files menu option from the Projects tab s pop up menu The Remove Project Files dialog will be displayed 2 Select the file s that you want to remove from the Project files list Click the Remove button to remove the file s or click the Remove All button to remove all files from the list
141. communication is directed Clients through the server machine The network system allows users to be given access rights to files This allows the project administrator to make sure the only people who can modify the project and source files are allowed to do so This might allow the administrator to limit each user to only have write capabilities for their own area of the project other areas would be read only This could limit any potential conflict or damage one user could do to other areas of the project These limitations can be set to a number of different levels This is outlined later in this section Note e Certain operations are locked when other clients are carrying them out This means that if one machine is currently changing the toolchain options all of the other machines can only see read only versions of this data e The performance of HEW does suffer when using the network facilities If working in a small team it might be more suitable to use the single user mode and version control 125 2CENESAS 10 Network Facilities 10 1 Enabling network access To use network access l a 3 Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog is displayed Select the Network tab Click the Enable network data access checkbox This should add an administrator to the system without a password The administrator is the only user that can add additional users to the system and change user access rights The administrato
142. ct CAHE W T oolstA enezat Shit R A bin badriash ere CAHEW T oolstA enesast Shit R A S binshelfeny exe CNHEW Tools Aenesas Shin W Sbinlbgsh exe CNHEW Tools AenesassSh x _ amp bnslibince pak CNHEW ST ools AenesassSh x x Sbinliberc pak CAHEWS T ools HenesassS hex SbinLnkS pawn exe CNHEW T oolstA enesass Shh Sb OPTLNK ESE Mm LL L T e lL Pn ee ar rL LEL alni ann Are you sure you want to delete the above files and folders Cancel 5 Technical support The Tools Administration dialog is capable of displaying information regarding hidden system components These are part of the HEW itself and cannot be registered unregistered manually If you check the Show all components checkbox on the Tools Administration dialog extra component folders are displayed see the figure below Shen Project Generators HBS H8 300 Project Generator ENE Renesas SH Project Generator 400 00 J Project Generators Custom Seen Yersion Control System s Custom WCS Pi kdir mtk 4 lie 1ml D i rsat m pe E mM IC i M Show all components When seeking technical support you may be asked to give details about some or all of these components To do so open the respective folder select a component and click the Properties button The Properties dialog will be invoked The HEW also has a feature that outputs tool information regarding the registered components to a file This allows you to retrieve information about t
143. ct the Tools Version Control Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed 2 Select the option to be modified from the top list and then click the Modify button The Define Commands dialog will be displayed 3 Commands are added via the Add button See section 8 2 Defining Version Control Commands for further information 4 Close the Define Commands dialog by clicking the OK button Close the Version Control Setup dialog by clicking the OK button 108 2CENESAS 8 1 2 8 Using the Custom Version Control System Define Commands for Add File z Commands ni Cancel Modit Renove Move up Maat Move dawn User menu options You can create as many user defined menu options as you like name them how you want and define their order in the menu User defined menu options do not appear on the version control toolbar To create a new user defined version control menu option l Select the Tools gt Version Control gt Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed Click the Add button The Add Menu Option dialog will be displayed Enter the name of the menu option into the Option field To add a command click the Add button See section 8 2 Defining Version Control Commands for further information about adding a command Close the Add Menu Option dialog by clicking the OK button
144. ctory will save the project information displayed in the Summary dialog box as a text file named Readme txt in the project directory 1 To Create a New Project Having Information from Makefile HEW can analyze GNU make format and Hmake format HEW generated and create a workspace which has file information from makefile Open the New Project Workspace dialog box and select the Import Makefile as project type After supplying some fields e g Workspace Name and pressing OK button New Project Import Makefile dialog box is appeared 155 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger the source files in the makefile again click Start Hew Project 1 6 Import Makefile mi Ed Makefile path CHEW Workspace SH4_Demo mal T Import options Start Source files E Froject Tg Aad C source file os dbsct c Add lowsre c F resetprg c a bese sbrk c Remove SH4_Demo c Baa Assembly source fil bese Intprg src ft Lees B loill ere l Show file path lt Back Next gt Pinker Cancel When a makefile is selected by Makefile path Source files shows source files in the makefile To view To apply toolchain options such as the compiler select the Import options check box If you want to remove a file from the project you can remove it by selecting the file and pressing Remove button And if you want to add a file to the project you can add it by pressing Add
145. currence of the label containing the text that you entered 10 Viewing the Source Corresponding to a Label Select a label and choose View Source from the pop up menu to open the Source or Disassembly window containing the address corresponding to the label 15 18 2 Elf Dwarf2 support The HEW supports the Elf Dwarf2 object file format for debugging applications written in C C and assembly language for Renesas microcomputers It provides a powerful way of accessing observing and modifying the symbolic level debugging information about the user application that is running Key Features e Source level debugging e C C operators e C C expression casting pointers references etc e Ambiguous function names e Overlay memory loading e Watch locals and user defined e Stack trace 1 C C operators The C C language operators are available amp l gt gt lt lt lt gt lt gt amp amp Buffer start 0x1000 R1 B 10001101 pointer 2 increment_size amp H FFFFO000 gt gt D 15 flag ER4 215 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 2 C C expressions Expression examples Object value Specifies direct reference of a member C C p_Object gt value Specifies indirect reference of a member C C Class value Specifies reference of a member with class C value Specifies a pointer C C amp value Specifies a reference C C
146. cutes the command for a given project file it will replace VCDIR for the equivalent version control directory in the file mapping For example suppose FILE1 C is located at c work application project1 FILE1 c If the GET command is applied to FILE1 cC then l x vc sw app projectil is substituted for VCDIR as this is the version control directory mapping for c work application projectl 2 FILE1 C is substituted for S FILENAME c work applications projectl filel c seveom S gurtemame Pe PY oT g xi vciswsapp projectl filel c Project File Arguments Command 8 3 3 Specifying Environment Select the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog to view the current settings To add a new environment variable 1 Click the Add button beside the Environment list the Environment Variable dialog will be invoked Environment arnable Ei E4 Varable OK k Value Cancel FP Placeholder popup menu 2 Enter the variable name into the Variable field 3 Enter the variable s value into the Value field 4 Click the OK button to add the new variable to the Environment list To modify an environment variable 1 Select the variable that you want to modify from the Environment list 2 Click the Modify button beside the list 3 Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields 4 Click the OK
147. d To modify a version control command 1 Select the command to be modified from the Commands list of the Define Commands dialog 2 Click the Modify button The Modify Command dialog will be displayed 3 Modify the information as necessary and then click the OK button To remove a version control command 1 Select the command to be removed from the Commands list of the Define Commands dialog 2 Click the Remove button To change the ordering of version control menu options 1 Select the menu option to be moved from the Commands list of the Define Commands dialog 2 Click the Move up and Move down buttons as necessary 8 2 1 Executable return code While each version control command executes its output is redirected to the Version Control tab of the Output window When the command s execution is complete its return code is obtained When defining a command you can determine whether this return code can be used to indicate that the command failed and that the remaining commands should not be executed 1 e abort The controls contained in the Executable return code group allow you to specify this behavior If the return code of the command s can be used to indicate a failure then you should select the Command has failed if the return code is radio button and set the drop down list and edit box as required If the Command has failed if the return code is radio button is selected then the HEW wil
148. d before they are used 12 3 Description blocks Basic outline A description block specifies one or more targets zero or more dependants and a list of commands which should be executed if the newest dependent is newer than the newest target If none of the targets exist and or none of the dependants exist then the commands will always be executed It is not necessary to specify any dependants if you wish the commands to always be executed A description block has the following syntax lt targetl gt lt target2 gt lt dependantl gt lt dependant2 gt lt command1 gt lt command2 gt gt lt commandn gt Any number of white space characters are allowed between the last target and the character and the first dependant and the character No white space is allowed before the first target Each target and each dependant must be separated by at least one white space character A tab character must be present at the start of a line containing a command Variables may be used in a description block using the syntax specified above under variable declarations There follows some examples of valid description blocks one of which uses the variable specified above under variable declarations c dirl filel obj c dir1 filel c c dir1 file1 h gcc c dirl filel c OUTPUT UNPUT DEPEND EXECUTABLE INPUT 264 2CENESAS 12 HMAKE User Guide Special commands There are two
149. d build them all 5 Results from the build are displayed in the Build tab of the Output window in the same way as in a normal build process 2 7 5 The Output Window When a tool executes i e compiler assembler linker etc its output is displayed in the Output window If any of the tools produce any errors or warnings then they are displayed along with the source file name and the line number at which the error is located To quickly locate a specific bug double click on a given error warning to invoke the current editor If you right click anywhere inside the output window a pop up menu will be invoked Pop up Menu Options Function Display next Error Warning Display next error or warning Display previous Error Warning Display previous error or warning Help Display help information for line Go to Error Warning Go to the associated source line Clear Window Clear the window Save Save the content of the window 2 7 6 Controlling the content of the output window It is often useful to display extra information such as the command line options that are being applied to a file during a build The HEW allows you to specify whether or not you want such options displayed in the Build tab of the Output window during a Build Build All or Build File operation via the Options dialog To view or hide extra information during a build 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Setup Options dialog will be displayed Selec
150. d long F main i OxO0000012 L start D 103 OUxDODUUSETa short The following items are displayed Kind Indicates the type of the symbol F Function P Function parameter 1 L Local variable 1 Name Indicates the symbol name Value Indicates the value address and type of the symbol 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform Option Clicking the right hand mouse button displays a pop up menu containing available options Pop up menu options Function Go to Source Go to the associated source line View Setting Specifying the Stack Trace window settings Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard 15 15 2 Specifying the View Choose View Setting from the pop up menu to open the Stack Trace Setting dialog box which allows the user to specify the Stack Trace window settings 205 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger stack Trace Setting Nest level 1 64 fo Display symbol Parameter Local Variable Diaplay Radix f Hexadecimal C Decimal C Octal C Binary Nest level Specifies the level of function call nesting to be displayed in the Stack Trace window Display symbol Specifies the symbol types to be displayed in addition to functions Display Radix Specifies the radix for displays in the Stack Trace window 15 15 3 Viewing the Source Program Select a function and choose Go to Source from the p
151. d name of the file involved in the operation Filename Filename including extension of the file involved in the operation File leaf Filename excluding extension of the file involved in the operation File extension Extension of the file involved in the operation File directory Directory of the file involved in the operation Configuration directory Current configuration directory Project directory Current project directory Workspace directory Current workspace directory Temp Directory Temporary directory Command directory Version control executable directory Windows directory Directory where Windows is installed Windows system directory Directory where Windows system files exist Workspace name Current workspace name Project name Current project name Configuration name Current configuration name 8 3 1 Specifying File Locations When referring to a file s location be sure to use a placeholder otherwise the command will only relate to a hardwired file For example let s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file The Arguments field could be specified as GET c vc files project main c However when executed this command can only ever GET the file MAIN C To resolve this problem HEW uses a system of placeholders and directory mappings Directory mappings tell the HEW which working directories i e where source files are being worked on map
152. debugging platform reading data from an I O register can sometimes affect the operation of your program For example reading a data register can cancel a pending interrupt Data is only read from I O modules that have been expanded in the IO window so that the register values are displayed Therefore as long as I O modules are collapsed when they no longer need to be displayed this will not cause a problem Also note that having a Memory window or Disassembly window open on the I O area can have the same effect 192 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 6 3 Manually loading an IO file To manually load an IO file right click on the IO window and select the Load IO File menu item on the IO window pop up A standard file browser is invoked Simply select the file you require to load and click OK The IO file will be loaded into the window See Reference 5 I O File Format for more information about a IO file format 15 6 4 Printing the Currently Displayed Contents The contents currently displayed in the window can be printed in a text file Select Print from the pop up menu 15 6 5 Saving the Currently Displayed Contents The contents currently displayed in the window can be saved in a text file Select Save to File from the pop up menu 15 6 6 Modifying I O register contents To edit the value in an I O register you can type hex values directly into the view To enter more complex expressions double click or p
153. do a previously check out operation on a file or files 1 e cancel any edits made View the status of a file View the history of a file These commands can only be accessed via the Tools Version Control sub menu whereas all of the other commands can be accessed from both the toolbar and the menu 120 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe 9 2 1 Removing a File from Version Control To remove a file s from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s that you would like to remove from Visual SourceSafe in the Workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof 2 Click the Remove Files toolbar button ich or select the Tools gt Version Control Remove Files menu option 9 2 2 Getting a Read Only Copy of a File from Version Control Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time However it is possible for any user to obtain a read only copy of any file To get a read only copy of a file s from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s that you would like to get from Visual SourceSafe in the Workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof ich 2 Click the Get Files toolbar button or select the Tools Version ControlGet Files menu option 9 2 3 Checking Out a Writable Copy of a File from Version Co
154. drop down list and then click the OK button Alternatively if you would like to add a tool of your own then follow the remaining steps Enter the name of the tool into the Name field Enter the command excluding arguments into the Command field Enter any arguments that you would like to pass to the command into the Arguments field Enter the initial directory in which you would like the tool to run into the Initial Directory field Click the OK button to add the menu option to the Setup menu 91 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 4 INDIRA explorer exe TEM ie E SIEGE on Exlsunia system bons Note New menu options are added to the bottom of the list 1 e bottom of the Tools menu by default However the order of menu options in the Setup menu can be modified To modify a menu option 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Customize dialog will be displayed Select the Menu tab 2 Select the menu option that you would like to modify and then click the Modify button Make the desired changes on the Modify Tool dialog and then click the OK button ModifyT ool Es plorer SIND IRRewploreceve I ETEME Bio To remove a menu option 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Customize dialog will be displayed Select the Menu tab 2 Select the menu option that you would like to remove and then click the Remove button 92 CENESAS 6 Customizing
155. e directory where the makefile was generated 2 Execute HMAKE Its command line is HMAKE EXE lt makefile gt Note The degree of portability of a generated makefile is entirely dependent upon how portable the project itself is For example any compiler options that include full paths to an output directory or include file directory will mean that when given to another user with a different installation the build will probably fail In general use placeholders wherever possible using a full specific path should be avoided when possible 51 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features 3 10 Using makefiles to build inside HEW The HEW also allows you to configure the internal build to use a particular make file rather than the internal HEW system when build is clicked The standard HEW integrated build should be fine for all of your building requirements However in some cases you may feel the need to use makefiles rather than relying on the HEW internal make system The techniques to do this are described below To set up the internal makefile execution 1 Create a base HEW workspace in which to launch your makefile in It makes sense if this is the same toolchain as the one to be used in your makefile Although this is not essential 2 Click on Setup gt Options Click the Build tab 4 Select the makefile command which should be used By default this is set to the Renesas make tool shipped with HEW This is called H
156. e Contents GO GO Runs program GO_RESET GR Runs program from reset GO_TILL GT Runs program until specified addresses HALT HA Halts program INITIALIZE IN Initializes the debugging platform system RESET RE Resets the microprocessor STEP ST Steps through program by instructions or source lines STEP MODE SM Sets the step mode STEP OUT SP Steps out of the current function STEP OVER SO Steps through program without stepping into functions STEP RATE SR Sets rate of stepping Memory Operation Commands Available when the debugger is connected Command Name Short Name Contents CACHE Sets caching on or off 1 FILE LOAD FL Loads an object program file FILE SAVE FS Saves memory to a file FILE UNLOAD FU Unloads an object file from memory FILE VERIFY FV Verifies file contents against memory si MEMORY COMPARE MC Compares memory contents MEMORY DISPLAY MD Displays memory contents MEMORY EDIT ME Modifies memory contents MEMORY FILL MF Fills a block of memory MEMORY FIND MI Finds a string in an area of memory MEMORY MOVE MV Moves a block of memory MEMORY TEST MT Tests a block of memory 1 1 Support for this command depends on the debugging platform For the syntax of each command refer to the online help 242 2CENESAS 3 Regular Expressions 3 Regular Expressions The HEW editor allows you to include special characters in search strings when performing a find replace or find in files operation Find Replace These ch
157. e HEW with the source file open at the line that was double clicked 206 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 16 1 Configuring the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with HEW The following details the information required to setup the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with HEW and launch from the external debugger option in HEW External debugger selected Hitachi Debugger Interface version 4 or greater jig Debugger settings HDI location P Browse Session file P Browse Download module te To configuring the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with HEW 1 Firstly the location of the debugger executable must be specified This must be version Hitachi Debugging Interface 4 0 or greater otherwise its behaviour is not guaranteed This may have been configured by the installation program or a project generation utility 2 The second item of data is the session file This tells the debugger which session to load when it is launched 3 Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the HEW to automatically switch to the debugger when the download module changes after a build 15 16 2 Configuring the PD debugger to integrate with HEW The following details the information required to setup the PD debugger to integrate with HEW and launch from the external debugger option in HEW 207 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger External debugger selected
158. e end of the current line in the editor None Home Move the cursor to the beginning of the current line in the editor None Insert Toggle insert and overwrite mode None Page up Moves the page in the editor up None Page down Moves the page in the editor down None Return Carriage return in the editor None TAB Insert a tab in the editor None ALT Mouse select Column selection in the editor CTRL ALT Page up Move to next tab For example output window CTRL ALT Page down Move to previous tab For example output window CTRL ALT Tab Move to next window ALT SHIFT BACKSPACE Redo alternative in the editor to CTRL Y Note Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 254 2CENESAS 8 Drag and Drop in the HEW debugger 8 Drag and Drop in the HEW Debugger When using the HEW debugger it is possible for each debug component to interact with the others This can be achieved simply by dragging objects from one view to another Some examples are listed below 1 Itis possible to drag a label from the labels view onto other debug views So for example if you drag a label onto the disassembly window it will scroll to the address that the label is located at 2 Itis possible to drag a watch variable from the editor into the watch window This automatically adds the watch variable to the window 3 Dragging a function name from the editor into the disassembly should jump the disassembly view to the label location
159. e extensions 4 12 2 Changing text colors To change existing colors 1 Select the Setup gt Format Views menu option The Format Views dialog will be displayed Select the view you are interested in changing the font for If it is the editor expand the source view in the tree on the left hand side of the dialog 2 Select the file type for which you want to edit syntax coloring from the File group list and then expand and select it 67 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 3 Select the keyword group you are interested in The tabs on the right side of the dialog change depending on the selection 4 Select the Color tab Modify the Foreground and Background color lists as desired The System color refers to the current window foreground and background settings in Control Panel 6 Click the OK button for the new color settings to take effect El ES SOWICE a Color Font Keywords Comments ee FD Selected Text D Text H E C list file C source file C header file File type E C source file Foreground ee BY Comments ee ve A Control as 2 be DY Declaration ee BY Operator Background i PreProcessor oo TEN C header file C list file Preprocessed C source file Expanded assembly source file Assembly source file Linkage symbol file Assembly mclude file HEW Sample Text 4 12 3 Creating new keywords To create new keyword groups 1 Select the Setup gt Forma
160. e list 46 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features To remove a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button A dependent file s path can include placeholders 3 5 File mappings By default the files input to a build phase are only taken from the project 1 e all project files of the type specified in the Select input file group drop down list on the New Build Phase dialog Select the Build gt Build Phases menu option The Build Phases dialog will be displayed If you would like a build phase to take files output from a previous build phase these files are called intermediate files then you must define this in the File Mappings tab of the Build Phases dialog Build Order Build File Order File Mappings Intermediate file mappings for build Add oH Assembler QptLinker Object tile SH GG Com SH Assembler Assembly source file SH GAG Com OptLinker Object tile SH G Libra OptLinker Library file Tela ta REMOVE A File Mapping means that you would like the output files of a certain type produced by one build phase referred to as the Source phase to another build phase referred to as the Destination phase Such intermediate files are then passed in addition to the project files To add a file mapping 1 Click the Add button The Define File Mapping dialog will be invoked 2 Select the source phase
161. e numbers source addresses coverage breakpoints and bookmarks View Mixed mode The mixed mode facility in a source file is different to the disassembly window mixed mode Instead of showing the continuous disassembly it shows the disassembly that is related to each line of source code This view cannot be edited and is only available when a debugger target is attached to the session This view allows breakpoints bookmarks and line numbers to be viewed View Disassembly The disassembly mode shows the true continuous disassembly code in address order This is the same Note as clicking the View gt Disassembly menu item Labels can be viewed in this view as well as addresses and disassembled code It is not possible to switch from the source window to the mixed display under the following conditions iF 2 3 4 The target is not connected to the current session No download modules have been downloaded No debug information is available for the current project The currently displayed file has been edited and the changes not saved 4 3 Working with Multiple Files The file area is where you will work with the files of your project The editor allows you to have many files open at one time to switch between them to arrange them in different configurations and to edit them in whichever order you want to The operations that you can perform upon the windows are typical of most Windows applications and they can be found under
162. e of a Control in the Setup cece ccesesssessessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 97 6 7 1 Scope of a Control in the Customize Dialog ccccccccccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 97 6 7 2 Scope of a Control in the Options Dialog BOX 00 ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 97 6 8 Specifying workspace options ccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeseeesessseeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 98 6 8 1 Open last Workspace at Start Up ccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 98 6 8 2 Restore files on Opening a WOTKSPAaCE cece cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeecececececeeeeeeceeeceeececceececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 98 6 8 3 Display workspace information on Opening a WOTKSPacCe c ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeestetssstssstsseeeeees 98 6 8 4 Save workspace before executing any phases cccccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 99 6 8 5 Prompt before saving a workspace cccceeeeeseeseeseseeeeseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeessaaaassssaasaaaasaaaaaaaasaaaaaas 99 6 8 6 Prompt before SAVING SESSION c cc cceecceeeeceteececeeceecceeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseseseeeeeeess 100 6 8 7 A to backup LACM MICS 5 acsnicedacteensndseaauseauaiesedinecsnaedeciesdedwedneteveetuebontedus tonnadualeordeduexareeauaboneeduns 100 6 8 8 Default directory for new workspaces cc ccccccsseeeeeeeeec
163. e the scroll bar Page Up Page Down key and Up Down key to change the display position To change the display address directly follow the procedure below 1 In place edit in the address display area Se leila j nogo ooga Address display area 2 To change the display address open the Display Address dialog by selecting one of the following operations e Double click the address display area you want to change OR e Choose the Address option from the pop up menu 179 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Display Address i Address fooo0o000 al Specify the displaying address in the Address field Drag amp Drop Manipulation Operation Select address on Memory Window s Address area and drop it into Changes the window s display start address to that another Memory Window s Address area address Select address text string on Disassembly Window s Address Changes the window s display start address to that area and drop it into Memory Window s Address area address Select variable name text string and drop it into Memory Changes the window s display start address to that Window s Address area address 15 3 11 Changing the Scroll Area Select the Scroll Area menu from the pop up menu of the memory window The Scroll Area dialog is displayed Scroll Area 7 Start Address ooo000 al End Address DFFFFF Cancel Specify the scroll range to be displayed By default the scroll range
164. e to add 7 Create a new custom phase E Add an eristing system phase System Phase Cancel Step 2 The second step asks what type of phase you would like to create There are two choices multiple or single When a multiple phase is executed the command is applied to each file in the project of a certain file group For example if you set the input file group to be C source files then the command will be executed once for each C source file in the project A single phase is executed once at most during a build 38 CENESAS 3 Advanced build features Hew Build Phase Step 2 of 4 LA What type of phase would you like ta create f Multiple phase The command ts applied to each file in a file group An example of this type of tool is a compiler or assembler Select input file group C source file Single phase The command i only ever executed once per build An example of this type of tool ts a linker The input file group list contains the current file groups defined for the project It is possible to define multiple input file groups by selecting the Multiple Groups entry in the input file group list C header file C list file Cancel J Wl C source file JCPU information file Expanded assembly source file Once this choice has been made the input file group selection is displayed as Multiple Groups This dialog allows the user to choose multiple input file groups for
165. ea 173 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Pop up menu options Toolbar bottom Function Set Set data at specified address Fill a Fill specified memory block with data Move z Move specified memory block to Compare 1 Al Comparing the contents of two memory blocks Test 1 Ful Testing an area of memory Save Memory contents A Saving memory contents in a text file Search 1 al Finding a value in memory Search Next 1 a Finding a next value in memory Address Specify display starting address Scroll Area Bi Specify scroll range Register 1 XXXXX Starting address to value of the register Followed Stack Pointer 1 Keep tracking of the stack pointer position Set Start Up Symbol Ea Changing the program display position Immediately after downloading Refresh ee Update of the window contents Lock Refresh Disabling update of the window contents Data Length lbyte I Display in 1 byte units 2bytes T Display in 2 bytes units 4bytes TTT Display in 4 bytes units Sbytes nuan Display in 8 bytes units Radix Hex 16 Display in hexadecimal Dec 10 Display in decimal Signed Dec 0 Display in signed decimal Oct 7 Display in octal Bin Display in binary Code ASCII dbe Displaying memory as ASCII characters default SJIS JIS UNICODE EUC Not supported Float a 3 Displaying memory as single precision floating point Double a Displaying memory as double precision floating point 16bit Fi
166. ebugging platform by sending text based commands instead of the window menus and commands It is especially useful if a series of predefined commands need to be sent to the debugging platform by calling them from a batch file and optionally recording the output in a log file Note To specify a file in the command line use a placeholder excluding TCL If you wish to specify a directory not included in the placeholder specify an absolute path After specifying the absolute path this file will not be correctly found when it is in another host computer or environment where the path content is different In such cases specify the file again Example FILE LOAD ELF DWAREF2 CONFIGDIR demo abs 14 1 Opening the Command Line Window Choose View gt Command Line or click the Command Line toolbar button to open the Command Line window Configuration of Command Line window Command Line no batch tile no log file Toolbar Bay Te E ld Ey Configuration Directory ey m A gt e This window allows the user to control the debugging platform by sending text based commands e A series of predefined command lines can be called from a file and the output can be recorded in a file e The command can be executed by pressing the Enter key after the command is input at the prompt gt on the last line For information about the available commands refer to Reference 2 List of Commands and the on line help e
167. ect and how each file should be built see the figure below Add Project Files Remowe Project Files Debug ON Optimize OF List File YES bet Compiler Options Debug OF ii Set Asembler Options List File YES ase mbler Source Files Debug OH Set Linker Options bhp File TES 2 3 1 Adding files to a project To add files to a project 1 Select one of the following operations e Select the Project gt Add Files menu option OR e Select the Add Files menu option from the Workspace window s pop up menu OR e Press INS when the Workspace window is selected 2 The Add File s dialog box will be displayed 3 Select the file s that you want to add and click the Add button There are other ways to add files to a project e Right clicking on an open file in the Editor window displays a pop up menu If the file is already in the project then the Add File To Project menu option is disabled Select the Add File To Project menu option to add the file to the current project e Inthe HEW it is also possible to Drag and Drop files from Windows Explorer onto the Workspace window These files will be automatically added to the project and displayed in the folder that they were dragged to Note If you add a file that has an unrecognized file type to the project then the file will be added to the project but certain functions will be disabled for this file When you double click on a file with an unre
168. ect the Project Dependent Projects menu option The Dependent Projects dialog will be displayed 2 Select the project to which you would like to add dependents When you do this the Dependent Projects list will display all of the projects in the workspace excluding the selected project 3 The Dependent Projects list has a checkbox for each project listed Set the associated checkboxes to make those projects depend upon the selected project 4 Click the OK button to confirm the new project dependencies Dependent projects 2 13 Removing a project from the workspace To remove a project from a workspace 1 Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select one of the following operations e Press DEL OR e Right click on the selected project to invoke a pop up menu Select the Remove Project menu option Note You cannot remove the Current project from the workspace 34 2CENESAS 2 Build basics 2 14 Relative projects paths in the workspace In the High performance Embedded Workshop when you add a project you can choose to add the project to the workspace using a relative path This allows you to position a file above the workspace directory and it will still be relocated correctly if you relocate the HEW workspace The project is always relative to the workspace so if the project is one directory above the workspace before it is moved the HEW will try to find the project in the same relati
169. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 32 2 11 Setting the Current Project ccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 33 2 12 Specifying dependencies between Projects cccccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeey 34 2 13 Removing a project from the workspace cccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 34 2 14 Relative projects paths in the workspace ccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeey 35 ZAD User Toles mthe WORKS PACS xcs cescceeeavsicednensasiedualiaedaxsesuieatebanpeasanaaieaioidaindeaecbieatesanieatananbeslasesencess J3 3 Advanced build features 00nnoeeeeeeoesssssssssssseeereeeessssssssssssseerreecesssssssssssoseteeeecessssssssssssseeereeeeesssssssseeo 37 3 1 The build process reviste issersisinr tassietsesei aanea EAE ENN a 37 3 1 1 MBS a OG eE E E E eneauazeneenennss 37 3 2 Creating a custom build phase cc ccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 38 3 3 Ord rme Bwild Pha8ES essees ee ene ne eter eee Sone nek ee te eee tee EEEE eee eee ee ee 4 3 3 1 Pud Order Ta Deessa dive ecient svees waited E ere aana iad E EE E 42 3 3 2 Build File Order WA Wiss och cttasasttanesaresncencnctaatycsatsisveou ss aerebiauuedcnns aie eaa aenea oa T Erue Eia E a 44 3 4 Setting custom build phase options saccessmasccadnosiewessvannanda
170. eeeeeseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeaaas 132 12 Nayigation Facilities eserse eaei ENE EEA ENEEK ENEE EAERI ENEE EREE 133 12 1 C Function and define navigation component c ccc eeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 134 12 2 Cr Navigation Com One iit scsgescsassiecessecccsdeateeereierqeeacsaiseineaqeerinstanencisi Genesee 135 13 D E E stad apse E E E tensusneaveneneesins 137 13 1 Graphically display map information of each map tyPe cccceesessssesesssssesseseseeseseseeeeeeeas 137 13 2 Changing the cursor position ccccccceeeeseeseeseeeseseeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeegs 139 13 3 Zooming in the display eresse eiin aiaee aN ee NE ENNE R EAN ENE AAE NANNAN TR EER 139 13 4 Setting back to the previous display cc ccccccccccccccceeeesseeseseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 139 13 5 Changing the zoom Mod a c5050e 4505s200aseancerdonssasoaieiseenioaidassaseaseastontaeeoean ie tostawsaaseasseewenee 140 13 6 Changing the map type being displayed nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnuesseeereeeeeeserererererererrrrerererrrrrseereeees 140 l4 Usmeihe Command LinG seisis Eni A EE A EEE O E E EEA 141 14 1 Opening the Command Line WindoW sseesesesseseneneesennnennrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrererreeeeeeeeseeeereseseresees 141 14 2 Specifying a Command File cc ceccessssssesesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 142 FAD
171. eld Click the OK button to finish creating the application Click the Modify button to modify an application The Modify Application dialog will be displayed This dialog is the same as the Add Application dialog described above except that the Name field is read only Modify the settings as desired and then click the OK button 5 Click the OK button to set the application for the selected file group 2 4 2 Creating a new file extension and file group If you want to manage files that are not by default recognized by the HEW e g documents then you need to create a new extension and a new file group To create a new file extension in a new file group 1 Select the Project gt File Extensions menu option from the menu bar The File Extensions dialog will be displayed 2 Click the Add button The Add File Extension dialog will be displayed 21 2CENESAS 2 Build basics Add File Extension File extension t fect 7 Cancel File group C Extension belongs to an existing group Absolute file f Extension belongs to a new group Text Associated application Open Text with windows defaut dd Madii Remove 3 Enter the extension that you want to define into the File extension field Use only alphanumerics and an underscore as characters of a file extension string The drop down list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current project Selecting o
172. emove button Note Placeholder pop up menus are included to ensure that the environment can be specified as flexibly as possible For further information about using placeholders see Reference 4 Placeholders 5 6 Uninstalling a component The HEW provides a built in Tools Uninstaller which can remove unregistered components To run the Tools Uninstaller 1 Select the Tools gt Admunistration menu option 2 Click the Uninstaller button The Uninstall HEW Tool dialog is displayed 82 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration Uninstall HEW Tool Select the directory in which to begin the search for tools fc WHEW Browse M Include subfolders Located tools which can be uninstalled Version Installation Directory retell Search status Idle 3 Enter the directory in which you would like to search into the search field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 4 Check the Include subfolders checkbox if you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it 5 Click the Start button to begin the search During the search the Start button will change to a Stop button Click the Stop button to halt the search at any time 6 The results of the search are shown in the Located tools which can be uninstalled list Select a component and click the Uninstall button to uninstall that component 7 Click the Close button to exit the dialog A c
173. en you are using multiple configurations it is likely that the linkage order will be very similar To do this effectively you can copy the current settings in the dialog to other configurations This 1s described below To copy the linkage order from one configuration to another l 2 Click the Build gt Linkage Order menu item Select the configuration you wish to copy in the current configuration list This defaults to the currently loaded configuration Click the Copy to button this displays the Select Configuration To Copy To dialog and asks you which of the configurations in the current project you wish to copy the current linkage order to Select a configuration and click OK Click OK to verify and save the changes 53 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features 54 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 Using the Editor 4 1 Editor window The editor window contains the file windows that are being viewed or edited The title bar of the active window will appear a different color from that of the others dbsct c is the active window in figure bellow All text operations such as typing pasting text and so forth only affect the active window To switch to another source file window 1 e to make some other window the active window there are a number of methods e Click on it if it is visible OR e Press CTRL TAB or SHIFT CTRL TAB to cycle through the windows one after another OR e Select the window by
174. enaseadsdonseadnesaseedsananesanennneesdonsdasnesaseeesarnnsxasenatveee 197 15 7 8 Splitting Up the Window Display cccccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 198 579 Saving Register Contents ss cpnanccecgtsatnnacedeannadrictunsgedeaanansadepnarsieataadeiadpeadeasantandeesaeinansadeeceaeecnes 198 15 7 10 Using register COMLCHIUS 55 150 saesasnagsevsonssaevaioseeaoaisansanesasssonssassasn aaaea a na aa ea aaaeaii 198 vii Table Of Contents 15 8 Resetting the Target MCU cceccsessesssssseessseseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseesesaessaassasaagagaas 198 139 SAPO UC MSO e EE E E E E EE E EE EE 198 1510 Initialize the Debuggine Platform sereissrsrissineteisinerinsina ninaning ekinini iaaii nana 198 15 11 Connects Disconnects the Debugging Platform ccc cccccccccccceececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 199 15 12 Executing your program ccccccccsssssesseseseeseeseseseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesessesssesssseseagags 199 15 12 1 Onn nE TOs T T ET ETE 199 ay a Running from reset sescrsssccsdsnstsesarsandeasacencnasscendcnsdcsnanaandeeannsaasnanasnaeacamsdasnansaadenanssaaenaassats 199 15 12 3 Running tO CUTSOT cic oscaseiensexcenesncaveuenncdederdntaveuensenceussacabeesnnadnderbatasteensanndecsaabtncnnatnderssasies 200 15 12 4 Running from a Specified Address ccccecesessssesssessssssseesssssssesssesssssssssssesesseseaaas 200 15 12 5 E E EE E E E E A EAA A N 201
175. ension in an existing file group 1 Select the Project gt File Extensions menu option from the menu bar The File Extensions dialog will be displayed 2 Click the Add button The Add File Extension dialog will be displayed Midd File Extension File extension E asm Cancel File group f Extension belongs to an existing group Assembly source file C Extension belongs to a new group pamen ssaclated applicata pen Broun voti Editor Y pda Modit Remove 3 Enter the extension that you want to define into the File extension field Use only alphanumerics and an underscore as characters of a file extension string The drop down list contains all extensions that are undefined in the current project Selecting one of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically 4 Select the Extension belongs to an existing group option and select the group to which you would like to add this new extension 5 Click the OK button to add the extension to the File Extensions list 23 CENESAS 2 Build basics 2 5 Setting build options Once you have added the necessary files to the project the next step is to instruct the HEW on how to build each file To do this you will need to select a menu option from the Build menu The contents of this menu depend upon which tools you are using To set options for a build phase 1 Select the Build men
176. er has no meaning when specifying a dependent file s location USERNAME PASSWORD VCDIR and COMMENT placeholders are acceptable only in version control If you enter a placeholder into an edit field where it is not acceptable you will be informed 4 4 Placeholder Tips Placeholders are there to allow you to create flexible paths to the various files used by the system e If there is a placeholder pop up menu gt next to an edit field into which you are about to enter a path or file you should consider how you can use a placeholder to make that path or file definition flexible e Ifyou use several configurations then the CONFIGDIR placeholder is very useful to ensure that files can be written to and from the current configuration s directory e Wherever possible use a placeholder They can always be removed or added later so don t be afraid to experiment 248 2CENESAS 5 V O File Format 5 VO File Format HEW formats the IO window based on information it finds in an I O Register definition file When you select a debugging platform HEW will look for a lt device gt IO file corresponding to the selected device and load it if it exists This file 1s a formatted text file that describes the I O modules and the address and size of their registers You can edit this file with a text editor to add support for memory mapped registers or peripherals you may have specific to your application e g registers in an
177. er the level will be administrator When this dialog is closed the HEW server window is opened and the network facilities are enabled 10 3 Adding new users to the system The initial setting of the network database adds an administrator user and a guest user to the system The following levels of access are possible in the HEW system Administrator Full access to every aspect of HEW The user can add and remove users from the projects and change access rights The administration user can change the workspace and project files and also the source files Full read write access The workspace and project files can be modified as can the source files But it is not possible to change user access rights from this access level Read write file access Only the source files can be modified All project settings can only be viewed not modified Read only All source files and project files can only be viewed as read only Nothing can be modified When any user opens a network enabled project they must type in their user name and password Until this is done no access can be granted Once entered the user is given one of the levels of access as seen above To add a new user to the system l A Log in with a user who has administrator access rights The process for doing this is described above Select Setup gt Options The Options dialog is displayed Select the Network tab Click the Access rights button The User
178. er to the separate Debugging Platform User Manual 15 1 Preparations for debugging This section describes the preparations for debugging your program You will learn how to select and configure a debugging platform with which to debug how to load the user program and what the debugger sessions are 15 1 1 Compiling for debug In order to be able to debug your program at C C source level your C C program must be compiled and linked with the Debug option enabled When this option is enabled the compiler puts all the information necessary for debugging your C C code into the absolute file or management information file which are usually called Debug Object Files When you create your project the initial setup will normally be configured for debug Notes e Make sure you have the debug option enabled on your compiler and linker when you generate an object file for debugging e If your debug object file does not contain any debugging information for example the S Record format then you can still load it into the debugging platform but you will only be able to debug at the assembly language level 145 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 1 2 Selecting a debugging platform Selecting the debugging platform is very dependent on the installation of the HEW If the HEW has a toolchain installed then the application project generator will be able to set up both the toolchain and the debugger targets simultaneously This allows
179. er will then display the add Command Line File dialog You can then specify the location of the file by either browsing to the file or using placeholders Clicking the Apply to all timings check box adds the batch file to every timing Click OK to add the batch file Once added it can moved into the correct place in the order by using the Up and Down buttons This is only valid if you are running multiple command line batch files 2 at Ot 161 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Command Line File Filename p Browse Ok Apply to all timings Cancel Other Options Do not perform automatic target connection If the option is checked the target 1s not 1 connected until you select Debug gt Connect If the option is unchecked the target is connected whenever a configuration is opened This happens when a new workspace or project is opened or also when you switch configuration using the toolbar or Build Configurations dialog box Download modules after build If the option is checked the user program will be automatically downloaded after a build Reset CPU after download module If the option is checked the debugger target will be automatically reset after downloading the user program Remove breakpoints on download If the option is checked the breakpoints will be automatically removed after downloading the user program 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platf
180. ersion Control Directory Mappings list and then click the Modify button The Version Control Directory Mapping dialog will be displayed Make the necessary changes to the two directories and then click the OK button to confirm the new settings Version Control Directory Mapping Source directory Ework Shared Browee Version control directory fe Wwe wwe shared Cancel To remove a directory mapping Select Tools Version Control Configure The Version Control Setup dialog will be Select the mapping to be removed from the Version Control Directory Mappings list and then l displayed Select the Projects tab 2 click the Remove button 8 3 2 Specifying File Locations Example Consider the scenario shown in the figure below It shows three directories which are mapped from a shared version control drive x to a local drive where the development is being done C LOCAL Ci Mapped Ta Cow vork application yr ojectt Mapped To coworklapplicationterc Mapped To coworkehared 2CENESAS COVEY lappiprojectt SWC app ere WCE appliehared 113 8 Using the Custom Version Control System Now let s imagine that a version control executable has been selected which uses a GET command to obtain a read only copy of a file In order to get all of the files in a project we need to use the following command GET S VCDIR S FILENAME When the HEW exe
181. es 209 15 17 1 External HEW synchronization ccccccccccccsccceccececcccceceeceeeececeeccecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 209 15 17 2 Internal HEW synchronization cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceesesseessssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseaaaeaas 209 15 18 Existing HEW functions dependent on the debugger ccccceeeesseseesseseeeeesssesssssseeaas 211 15 18 1 Look ine at De enen E TEE 211 15 18 2 FEDW ARM 2 Suppo ase S eee 215 15 18 3 Lookin at vaa Die S esna EE E EEA E E E EE RA 218 16 Technical SUPPOM wessscees lt sasazanesasguesdeatenssaxath vasasauwesatessseenseanwesateevasascsawcsanedeseantbanwasaleitexsnubarsineexdon 221 G Check Tor UPIME e nE S E E EE T E EE E tse Sesame Ne 221 102 Creatine a But REPON sosrsirsicissr iaria i E EE E S E SE 22 E E E e A E E E A E E E A O E E EA E E E E E EE ec esqaatees 229 t Listof IVC US iss cscs anins sat esta enenu r a eeo e a lap Eeee a EE ETE R EE rE EEE Erie 231 1 1 List of File Menia EE eT 231 L LAST Oh GE M DU ea E E E E A EA 232 1 3 Listof View MOMUsssisciciuienieieiriiee inion iaei aa aae a AEE Eia NER E EE READE ETE EE 233 vili Table Of Contents 1 4 List of Project Menu ccc ccccecessssssssssssssssesseeeeeseeeesseseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseegaas 233 1 5 List of Build AU aca ccaocta eee E EENE EE EEE E EEES 234 L Tes POP Debug Memi esrtis enna EEE RTE ETE EEE ARTOA ETER TENA 235 L7 MASE OE SOE Monee E EEE rE ETE 236 1 8 List of Tools Ment cas
182. es ouster psessiesstvonateivenasueleustvonudenpstegwdeamwonatedenanesiasienateuplannseatesseresbieskees ephaasthans 236 L9 MG POT Window IVE 1A yea ects seinen cance eo tina cdearateabtie de acsnuedaaeabtiedeasdesiauasastededanscdectantedeestesiuasonaceess 237 LIO Listof Help Meny een nen enn ne eee ee ene Pee ene nnn ne at eee nee E een en ne ene nr rer 237 2 Listof Commands sesseresseersee rieneke vg ea oslo EEEE oslo aaah as DESENE ea 239 2 1 Command List Alphabetically Order cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeees 239 a2 Command List Listed as the Functions ccccccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 241 3 Regular EXpressions access oacesestoashcesavlai patasrnttetobresinttanagtlbon veaitdalsalanelcan vacinecilsnaqelian waandeebalasaehanvasaeesaaateaelesentiaaeeess 243 UMM och 2 110 a a ee a E a nn E ne a SO ee 245 4 1 What is a Placeholder sscssccscrasncsecsatanancnateteeaoaancnrenadaeacssdizassatahateeanaaeainasahacebisahestinsshaeinnsaneeinsabadin 245 4d Inoertine a Placeholder ee el nee ee EEEE ANEA 245 4 3 Avallable Placehold rS aa seccheo cede cadcsauasencndnacenaednciosdedinacduasauaencnduacsnaednciosdedndsduasduatahandeecsoacdenteneaeahs 247 AA Placeholder LIPS ee ene eee eee ee areae aaaea ere 248 3 FOr TOn een he ene eee nee ene en ne eee ee ee eee O ee Te eee 249 VAD OL BS FOMA errien E EE EEEE EET EREE EEE RNT 251 7 Keyboard Shortcuts eo scecocseit
183. es the contents of the Windows clipboard into the active window at the position of the insertion cursor D Toolbar display Showing hiding toolbar buttons Customize toolbar Customizing toolbar buttons 14 2 Specifying a Command File It is useful to use a command file when a series of predefined command lines need to be executed Create a command file by a text editor and write necessary command lines The default extension of a command file is hdc Choose Set Batch File from the pop up menu to open the Set Batch File dialog box in which the name of a command file hdc can be specified Clicking the OK button displays the specified command file name as the window title Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box without modifying the setting Set Batch File EI Ei Batch File gt Browse DK 14 3 Executing a Command File Click the Play button in the Set Batch File dialog box or choose Play from the pop up menu to execute the command file The Play menu is displayed in gray while the file is running and can be used when the command file execution stops and control returns to the user 142 2CENESAS 14 Using the Command Line 14 4 Stopping Command Execution Choose Stop from the pop up menu to stop command execution The Stop menu becomes valid during command execution 14 5 Specifying a Log File Choose Set Log File from the pop up menu to open the Open Log File dial
184. eseeessseeseeeseseeeeeeeessssssssssssssseaaas 190 Roe CMs onsite the IO MENO geet eee Nene ene nn ene nee E eset PAtr SneNEN SE rer EsTT ooONe Ne eee ene oem 191 15601 Opena the lO Window sssrinin iir i E TE eE Ea ET EEEREN 191 15 6 2 Expanding an I O register display c cece cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192 15 6 3 Manually loading an IO file cc cccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 193 15 6 4 Printing the Currently Displayed Content cccccccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 193 15 6 5 Saving the Currently Displayed Contents ccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 193 15 6 6 Modifying I O register contents siressa eden ee 193 t57 Lookin A GS oaia nE a E a aE a E O EEE E EE 193 15 7 1 Opening the Register WindOw cccccccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 193 15 7 2 Changing the Register Display Radix ccccccccccssessesseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 194 t573 Switching Register Bank ssncrossrciporiioted ni oi Eee EE O E E E E EE EEE 194 IA CURIS he Layon spairne a E e NT 195 15 7 5 Choosing a Register to be Displayed sicsiciscacieccnstencsavacsnadunsiavnsesacsiadensiestinvadioadsnaieersesteaeiars 196 15 70 Modify me Resister COM S eessreninaisiiin rsin a n ii ain EE aia 197 15 7 7 Setting the Flag Value gssscccscssxensenasqadsasasnzan
185. files ve cicacteesntesdcesnetddesdadandesdaeadiidedadantnndaatded enadendasdianadddadiedaatan tantaed esednetannabensedpninsdantantacdesndeseees 16 21 Adding TIES t0 a Projeti sgecasceccuceesccdoscnsece newsbeadusactecances AA EEA NAA EEA EAER 16 Zo Removing files from a Project cccceeesseseeesesssesssesseeseeeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeessasaasaaasssesaaaaaaaaaaas 17 2 3 3 Excluding a project file from DUC cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeess 18 2 3 4 Including a project file in DUI cccccceeeeeeeeeeeecceeceeceeeceeceeccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseseseeess 18 2 4 File extensions and file groups ccccccccccccccccccccecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 2 4 1 Associating an application with a file QrOUD ccccssssssseessessssssssssssssssssssesssssseaeaaeaeaaees 19 2 4 2 Creating a new file extension and file group uu eeccccceecececcccceceeeceeccecceeceeeceeeeseseeeeeeeeeeees 21 2 4 3 Creating a new file extension 0 ccccccccccceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeess 23 2D De VS LAINE ICING 5 szerastuganrnyaciacistoasecieo nse estos sess rsientstanegenaticesen sccesenaaaeasersueaesesseaesess eee oaeueuesoaees 24 20 ECU CG MOF 11602101 210 6 11 Neen nee nen ere ate one a eT Ten TE ee oe nee E 24 2 6 1 Selecting a build configuration cece cccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 25 2 6
186. fresh Stop Real time X2 X4 X8 128 256 512 Function Not refresh the window contents Automatically update the window contents when user program execution stops Real time updated the window contents Updates the window contents Zoom in display Zoom out display Resets the zoom display The zoom magnification is 2 The zoom magnification is 4 The zoom magnification is 8 The size of the X axis is 128 pixels The size of the X axis is 256 pixels The size of the X axis is 512 pixels Hides the cursor display Displays the sampling information of the cursor location Specifies the waveform format 189 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 5 2 Automatically Updating the Window Contents Checking Auto Refresh gt Not Refresh in the pop up menu will not refresh the window Checking Auto Refresh gt Stop in the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated when user program execution stops Checking Auto Refresh gt Realtime in the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be real time updated 15 5 3 Updating the Window Contents Selecting Refresh Now from the pop up menu immediately updates the window contents 15 5 4 Zoom in Display Selecting Zoom In from the pop up menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal axis enlarged 15 5 5 Zoom Out Display Selecting Zoom Out from the pop up menu displays the waveforms with the horizontal axis reduced 15 5 6 Resetting the Zoom
187. fy function depends on the debugging platform If you did not drag the address range to be filled you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start address entered value When specifying the value Click the Value button in the Data Type group Specify the data length in the Length field When setting the character Click the String button in the Data Type group Specify the character code in the Code field When the display data length is two bytes two bytes worth of a character can be specified Please use the Set dialog to specify the character string Select menu Set 15 3 5 Copying an Area of Memory You can copy an area of memory using the memory copy feature Select a copy source address range in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Move option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Move dialog box is displayed 176 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger start Address jononoooo End Address jooooonF Move Address ft Leneth libyte Werify Cancel Enter the copy destination start address in the Move Address field Select the Verify check box Support for verify function depends on the debugging platform If you did not drag the copy source address range you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus the end address will become the start
188. g Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Changes the column width of a label Saves the specific range Prints the specific range Sets or clears a software breakpoint at the line showing the address Enable or disable the current software breakpoint 169 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 2 3 Disassembly lock refresh It is possible to lock an memory range in the disassembly so that it does not refresh This function is called the disassembly lock refresh Right click on the disassembly window and select Lock Refresh The Lock Refresh dialog is displayed Lock Refresh fe Start Address 00002514 Cancel End Address 00002528 a Check the Locked check box The controls should now enable Select the start and end address that should be locked and cached so that no updates are displayed Click OK The view refreshes to only show the locked area 15 2 4 Looking at a specific address When you are looking at your program in a Disassembly view you may want to look at another area of your program s code Rather than scrolling through a lot of code in the program you can go directly to a specific address Select the Set Address option from the pop up menu and the Set Address dialog will be displayed Set Address 00002514 C n E Enter the address or label name in the edit box and either click the OK button or press the ENTER key The Disassembly view updates to sh
189. g a Template To insert a template 1 Select one of the following operations to display the Insert Template dialog e Click the Insert Template toolbar button T OR e Select the Edit Templates gt Insert Template menu option OR e Right click and select the Templates Insert Templates menu option from the pop up menu 71 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 2 Use the Template Name drop down list to select the name of the template to be inserted and then click the OK button The dialog is closed and the chosen template is added to the current Editor window Alternatively you can press ALT along with the number of the template to be inserted e g ALT 4 to insert template 4 You can define these shortcuts on the templates dialog A drop down list is available 4 14 Brace Matching Complicated source code can often become unwieldy especially when blocks of C C code are deeply nested within each other or when complex logic statements are expressed within a large if clause To help in such situations the High performance Embedded Workshop editor provides a Brace Matching feature which highlights text between braces of type and To find a matching brace 1 Either highlight the open brace to match from or place the cursor before it 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Match Braces toolbar button Ed OR e Press SHIFT CTRL M OR e Select the Edit gt Match Braces menu option O
190. g of either the Show workspace information on workspace open check box in the Workspace Properties dialog box or the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace check box on the Workspace tab of the Option dialog box Click the OK button in the Workspace Properties dialog box to open the workspace Click the Cancel button to stop opening the workspace 10 If Show workspace information on workspace open 2CENESAS 1 Overview The HEW keeps track of the last five workspaces that you have opened and adds them to the File menu under the Recent Workspaces submenu This gives you a shortcut to opening workspaces which you have used recently To open a recently used workspace Select Open a recent project workspace in the Welcome dialog box select the name of the workspace from the drop down list and then click the OK button Another way is to select File gt Recent Workspaces and then from this submenu select the name of the workspace Note The HEW only permits one workspace to be open at a time Consequently if you attempt to open a second workspace the first will be closed before the new one is opened 1 7 Using old workspaces The HEW can open any workspace that was created on a previous version of the HEW This should be automatically upgraded when the workspace is opened A back up version of the initial workspace or project file must be saved in the current directory of the file t
191. ger 4 Locals window The local variables and their values can be displayed in the Locals window a Opening the Locals Window To open the Locals window click the Locals toolbar button A or choose View gt Symbol gt Locals Configuration of Locals window Locals Toolbar pie 10 5 2 2 Name Value Type al 73FFFFB0 long 10 mrn ee H CHIARA a Tong a max H OOO40001 Re long 7 As you debug your program the Locals window will be updated If a local variable is not initialized when defined then the value in the Locals window will be undefined until a value is assigned to the local variable The local variable values and the radix for local variable display can be modified in the same manner as in the Watch window Option Clicking the right hand mouse button displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Toolbar bottom Function Edit Value Launches a dialog box to modify the selected variable s value Radix Hexadecimal J Display in hexadecimal Decimal 10 Display in decimal Octal g Display in octal Binary E Display in binary Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Toolbar display Showing hiding toolbar
192. haracter in the set for example a z or A Z is special only when placed in the first character position within the bracket set Using in the first position complements the set of items to be matched For example a z matches all characters except for lowercase English letters Finally in order to include a as a character in the bracket set you must include it as the first character in the set as in abc or abc Group regular expression items into sub expressions which are treated as a single unit For example whereas ab matches a ab abb and so on ab matches the empty string ab abab and so on and are not treated as special characters inside a bracket expression Escapes a regular expression character causing it to be treated as a regular character For example whereas ab indicates a sub expression consisting of ab ab denotes the sequence of characters a b and Note To specify the character in C source code you must specify as the C compiler treats the character as special denoting the beginning of an escape sequence embedded in the C source code In data files or text controls in dialog boxes however the double backslash is not necessary Indicates that a regular expression or sub expression is anchored at the beginning of the input string For example ab matches ab and abc but not cab Recall that is treated differently in bracket expressions Indicates that a regu
193. hat has been upgraded 1 8 Saving a workspace To save a HEW workspace select the File gt Save Workspace menu option 1 9 Closing a workspace To close a HEW workspace select the File gt Close Workspace menu option If there are any outstanding changes to the workspace or any of its projects you will be requested whether or not you wish to save them 1 10 Exiting the HEW The HEW can be exited by selecting the File gt Exit menu option pressing ALT F4 or by selecting the close option from the system menu which is opened by clicking the icon at the upper left corner of the HEW title bar 1 11 Component System Overview The HEW allows the user to extend the HEW functionality by adding additional components to the system This is achieved by registering the component in the Tools Administration dialog box These components can add windows menus and toolbars to the HEW system Examples of the components are the debugger and builder components of HEW The debugger component adds all of the menus and toolbars associated with the debugger and the builder component does the same for the build functionality The components you have registered in the system will modify the look and feel of HEW In some cases you may not have some of the menus which you can see in this manual For instance if the builder component is not installed you will not have the toolchain menu option in the Build menu 11 2CENESAS 1 Overview 1 12 Deb
194. he when the SH H8 or R8C E7 E8 family is in use or when the M32C M32R M16C or R8C excluding E7 E8 family is in use character e g PC or PC Note Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 15 8 Resetting the Target MCU To reset the target MCU click the Reset CPU toolbar button elt or select the Debug gt Reset CPU menu option Resetting the target MCU initializes the on chip I O registers and makes the program counter jump to the address set in the reset vector 15 9 Set PC to Cursor To changes the value of the PC to the address at the row of the text cursor click the Set PC to the cursor button Fe or Select the Debug gt Set PC to the Cursor menu option 15 10 Initialize the Debugging Platform Select the Debug gt Initialize menu option It will close down any open child windows and shut down the link to the debugging platform If this 1s successful an attempt to re establish the link to the debugging platform will be made 198 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 11 Connects Disconnects the Debugging Platform To connects the debugging platform an l 1 Click the Connect toolbar button or select the Debug gt Connect menu option To disconnects the debugging platform 1 Click the Disconnect toolbar button 2E or select the Debug gt Disconnect menu option Note Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 1
195. he Editor tab 2 Enter into Tab Size the number of desired tabs Click the OK button for the new tab settings to take effect To use spaces as tabs 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab 2 Set the Use spaces as tabs checkbox as appropriate 3 Click the OK button for the new tab settings to take effect 4 9 3 Auto Indentation When you press RETURN in the editor the insertion cursor will move to the next line down at the first column i e against the left hand side of the window Auto Indentation is a feature which when RETURN 1s pressed places the insertion cursor on the next line as before but under the first non whitespace character of the previous line This enables you to type neat C C or assembler code faster as you don t have to type leading spaces or tabs yourself The figure below illustrates two examples The first shows the effect of pressing RETURN when the Auto Indentation feature is disabled the insertion cursor returns to the left hand side of the window on the next line When the int z 20 line is typed it is not aligned with the previous two lines The second 65 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor example shows the effect of pressing RETURN when Auto Indentation is enabled the insertion cursor drops underneath the i of the int word on the previous line Now when the int z 20 line is typed it
196. he HEW main window Figure 1 below shows a docked Workspace window and figure 11 below shows a floating Workspace window x cin Workspace i W xj ae intpre sre Intore sre lowly Lere lowly ere E vectthlerc o e E vecttblere e vhandler sre Dg vhandler sre oy a C source file a a C source file o ope dbact c o dbsct c o demac i demo c gt lowsrec lowerc c Eason resetpre c resetpre c woe sbrke When the Workspace window or the Output window is docked it has a control bar as shown below If you want to move a docked window click and drag its control bar to the new location Close Button Control bar as To dock the Workspace window or the Output window 1 Ensure that the Allow Docking option is checked on the window s pop up menu 2 Select one of the following operations e Double click on the title bar of a floating window OR e Drag the title bar of a floating window and draw it toward an edge of a docked window menu bar or toolbar or the HEW main frame on whose edge you would like to dock the windows To float the Workspace window or the Output window 1 Ensure that the Allow Docking option is checked on the window s pop up menu 2 Select one of the following operations e Double click on the control bar of a docked window OR e Drag the control bar of a docked window and draw it away from the edge of the HEW main frame and from an edge of
197. he entire HEW system This information can then be sent to your technical support contact if you are experiencing problems with the HEW To output tool information 1 Click the Tools gt Administration menu item 2 Click the Tool information button A Save tool information file dialog is displayed 3 Choose the location of the output file and click the OK button 4 A file is created in the chosen location with the current registered tool setup of the HEW 84 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration If any of the components have problems these can be seen in the tools administration dialog If the icon has an additional icon this explains the problem There are two additional icons that can be displayed If a component is found but cannot be used due to it being an old version or another dependent component is not available then the icon in figure below is used to show this 7 H85 H8 300 Series Simulator Target Platform 3 0 HMon Embedded Monitor Platform 1 0 Intel Hex Record Obiect Header 1 0 Component not found icon If the component is not located where the registration file says it is then the icon in figure below is used to show this Registered components Component H85 HE S00 Standard Toolcha superH RISO engine Standard muner H AMSG eneine Standard Incompatible component found icon Note If the tool has one of these errors then it is possible to get more information by the following method To
198. he workspace icon from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Right click to invoke the pop up menu and then select the Properties option The Workspace Properties dialog will be displayed Enter the description into the Information field 4 Set the Show workspace information on workspace open checkbox if you want a Workspace Properties dialog to be launched on opening a workspace This checkbox has the same role as the Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace checkbox on the Workspace tab of the Tools Options dialog 5 Click the OK button to confirm the new settings or click the Cancel button to discard the changes W Display workspace information dialog on opening workspace 6 8 4 Save workspace before executing any phases It is possible to force the High performance Embedded Workshop into saving the current workspace before executing any build phases i e build build all or build file operations or version control commands To save the workspace before executing any phases 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Workspace tab 2 Set the Save workspace before executing any tools checkbox Click the OK button to confirm the new settings W Save workspace before executing any tools 6 8 5 Prompt before saving a workspace If you are using the Save workspace before executing any phases function you may want the HEW to prompt you before savi
199. heck box can be used when we cannot download the actual module to the memory on the target For example the program may be resident in a read only memory type like flash In this instance you can download just the debug information to RAM so that it is still possible to debug the user code The Perform memory verify during download checkbox can be used to do additional checks when downloading the module to ensure it was correctly downloaded to the target device The Download automatically on target connection checkbox can be used to automatically download the module when the target is being connected When you click the OK button the debug download module is added to the bottom of the list If you wish to position the module in a different position in relation to the other modules select the module and then use the Up and Down buttons to position the module correctly Any changes made in the Debug Settings dialog are only changed when you click OK The default debug format is set to the first download module in the list by default Only one default debug object format can be specified for each session All currently installed debugger formats are listed here 160 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 6 Manually downloading modules Once you have decided which download modules are to be downloaded to the target it 1s possible to manually update the modules on the connected target This is achieved by selecting the Debug gt Do
200. hich information is displayed The following four sections detail the effect of each option on the Configure View dialog Show Dependencies Under Each File If you check the Show dependencies under each file checkbox the dependent files are shown under the including source file as a flat structure i e the files themselves become folders as in figure ii below If this option is not selected then a separate folder contains all dependencies as in figure i below 2 wt Workspace lel On Workspace o ES Demo EB Demo Ey a Assembly source file aj a Assembly source file a B lowly sre Bb lowlyl src a irs C source file C source tile T dbect c H E dbsct c m 6 Demo c aes Demo c ie intpra c H A intprg c lowerc c oe B vecth resetprg c H E lowsre c o shrike fc lowerc h 8 vecttbhe E resetpra c H E Dependencies B stackscth lowsre A E sbrk c E sbrk h B sbrk h LE stackscth A vecttble L E vecth EJ vecth a Mawigatior Ol Projects 30 2 Build basics Show Standard Library Includes By default any dependent files found in standard include paths will not be shown as in figure j below For example in C code if you write a include statement such as include lt stdio h gt stdio h will not be listed as a dependent file To view such system include files select the Show standard library includes checkbox as in figure jj below lil lil
201. ialog box Program Counter Instruction address to start execution The initial value is the current PC value Temporary PC Breakpoints A temporary PC breakpoint When execution started by this dialog box stops this breakpoint is cleared Note The Temporary PC Breakpoints feature requires a PC breakpoint if you have already used all those available then the feature will not work 200 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Clicking the Go button starts execution according to the settings Clicking the Reset Go button starts execution from the reset vector Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog box without executing instructions 15 12 5 Single step When you are debugging your code it is very useful to be able to step a single line or instruction at a time and examine the effect of that instruction on the system In the Source view a step operation will step a single source line In the Disassembly view a step operation will step a single assembly language instruction If the instruction calls another function or subroutine you have the option to either step into or step over the function If the instruction does not perform a call then either option will cause the debugger to execute the instruction and stop at the next instruction If you choose to step into the function the debugger will execute the call and stop at the first line or instruction of the function To step into the function e Click the Step In t
202. if This character matches the tab character Example 1 t8 Finds every occurrence of a tab character followed by an 8 Example 2 init t Finds every occurrence of a tab character following init This matches any one character or a range of single characters listed within the brackets Brackets cannot be nested specifies a range of characters e g a z or 0 9 The beginning character in the range must have a lower ASCII value than the ending character of the range matches a single character if it is not any one of the characters between and This pattern also matches newline characters unless the newline character is included within the brackets Example 1 AEIOU Finds every uppercase vowel Example 2 lt Finds a literal lt gt or Example 3 A Za z0 9_ Matches an upper or lowercase letter a digit or an underscore Example 4 0 9 Matches any character except a digit Example 5 t n Matches a space a tab or newline Example 6 Matches a literal if is placed after This is the regular expression override character If the character following the backslash is a regular expression character it is treated as a normal character The backslash 1s ignored if it is followed by a normal non regular expression character Example 1 Searches for every occurrence of an asterisk Example 2 Searches for every occurrence of a backslash 2CENESAS 4 Placeholders 4 Placeholders
203. ilable in the sessions drop list box on the main toolbar You can create a new empty session in the project directory The session will use the session name as its new file name If the file name already exists then an error is displayed To add a new empty session 1 Choose the Debug Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed 2 Click the Add button The Add Session dialog box will be displayed Click the Add New Session radio button 4 Enter a name for the session 163 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 5 Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box Odd a new session Hame NewSession You can import session data from another file and create a new session file in the project directory All information is an exact copy of the file the data was imported from To import an existing session into a new session file 1 Choose the Debug Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed Click the Add button The Add Session dialog box will be displayed Click the Add An Existing Session File radio button Enter a name for the session Browse to an existing session file location which you would like to import into the current project Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box oe eae Use an existing session file Name Tutorial mnession tile path Browse Upen and ma
204. ill require you to repeat steps 7 9 for as many projects as are present in the current workspace The High performance Embedded Workshop has now created the necessary projects within Visual SourceSafe and set up the version control toolbar and menu for immediate access However although the Visual SourceSafe projects themselves have been created no files have been added to them 119 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe 9 1 2 Adding files to Visual SourceSafe There may exist a mapping between the project directory on your hard disk i e the working directory and the project directory in Visual SourceSafe 1 e the controlled directory see the Directory mappings topic for further information However the project directory and any subdirectories on your hard disk may contain many source files whereas the directory it is mapped to in Visual SourceSafe will be initially empty You must tell the HEW which files should be controlled 1 e which files should be added to the Visual SourceSafe project To add a file s to Visual SourceSafe I Ensure that Visual SourceSafe has been selected as the version control system see the Connecting a workspace to Visual SourceSafe topic for further information Select the file s that you would like to add to Visual SourceSafe in the Workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof When selecting the project or workspace folder the
205. ime it was invoked However in some circumstances you may need to register components yourself In some cases it is useful to search a drive for HEW compatible components This is especially useful if the HEW installation was deleted or corrupted as it can recreate your tool information instantly To search for components and register them 1 Click the Search Disk button on the Tools Administration dialog The Search Disk for Components dialog will be displayed 2 Enter the directory in which you would like to search into the top field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 3 Check the Include Subfolders checkbox if you would like to search the directory specified and all directories below it 4 Click the Start button to begin the search During the search the Start button will change to a Stop button Click the Stop button to halt the search at any time 5 The results of the search are shown in the Located Components list Select a component and click the Register button to register an individual component or click the Register All button to register all located components 6 Click the Close button to exit the dialog 79 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration Search Disk for Components Select the directory in which to begin the search ic SHE Browse M Include subfolders Located components Version HAF Location a Register Hew angetSerer 1 03 00 CAHE System SEC Hew argetSer Generic
206. ing the Browse button 3 Click the OK button to add this output file to the list To modify an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to modify 2 Click the Modify button The Modify Output File dialog will be invoked 3 Modify the fields as required 4 Click the OK button to add the modified entry back to the list To remove an output file 1 Select the output file that you would like to remove 2 Click the Remove button An output file s path can include placeholders 3 4 3 Dependent Files Tab This tab is where you can specify the dependent files that are needed by the phase Before each file is passed into this phase the HEW checks that the dependent files are of a more recent date than the input file If so the phase will be executed for that file i e dependent files have been modified since the input file s was last modified If not the phase will not be executed Dependent Files Dependent files To add a dependent file 1 Click the Add button The Add Dependent File dialog will be invoked 2 Enter the file path or browse to it using the Browse button 3 Click the OK button to add this output file to the list To modify a dependent file 1 Select the dependent file that you would like to modify 2 Click the Modify button The Modify Dependent File dialog will be invoked 3 Modify the fields as required 4 Click the OK button to add the modified entry back to th
207. intain link to session file Make session tile link read arly This operation can also be achieved by using the File gt Import session To import an existing session using File gt Import Session 1 Choose the File Import Session menu option The Session Name dialog box is displayed Session Hame Ei Session name Cancel i 2 Enter the new session name Select the session file you wish to import into the new session 4 Click OK A new session as added with the same settings as the file you browsed to but with the new name 3 Importing a link to a session You can add a new session to the HEW system but link to the session file in its location rather than importing or copying the file to the project directory This is useful when sharing debugger information with other users in a network environment 164 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger To import a link to an existing session file l ee Pe Choose the Debug Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed Click the Add button The Add new session dialog box will be displayed Click the Use an existing session file radio button Enter a name for the session Browse to an existing session file location which you would like to import into the current project Click the Open and maintain link to session file checkbox This means the session will not be imported into the project di
208. ion This dialog allows instant selection of either the default HEW keyboard shortcuts or the PD debugger shortcuts To change the entire keyboard layout select an item in the Default keyboard layout list By default it uses the High performance Embedded Workshop settings A number of operations are possible on this dialog To add a new keyboard shortcut 1 Select the main menu category of the command you wish to modify It is only possible to modify the commands that have a menu Only some cases are special that allow modification these are named global 2 Select the command you wish to modify or add a new keyboard shortcut for in the Commands list The current shortcut is displayed in the Current keyboard shortcut field 4 Enter the new shortcut in the New keyboard shortcut field Various combinations of buttons can be used here For example CTRL J or SHIFT CTRL O etc If the chosen shortcut is already in use it is displayed below the New keyboard shortcut field 5 Ifyou are happy with your selection click the Assign button 6 Changes are not saved until the OK button is clicked on the Customize dialog To remove a keyboard shortcut 96 1 Select the main menu category of the command you wish to modify It is only possible to modify the commands that have a menu Only some cases are special that allow modification these are named global 2 Select the command you wish to modify or add a new keyboard
209. ion dialog is displayed Browse to the new file location og E a If you only want to export the session file to another location then leave the Maintain link checkbox unchecked If you would like HEW to use this location instead of the current session location then check the Maintain link checkbox 6 Click the OK button To save a session with a different name using File gt Save Sessions As 1 Choose the File gt Save Sessions As menu option The Session Name dialog box is displayed Session Hame Ed Session name Cancel 2 Enter the new session name 3 Click the OK button i 166 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 7 Reloading Session Information To reload a session Select File gt Refresh session Clicking this will lose any changes to your session currently and the reload the current session into HEW A confirmation will be displayed before the reload happens 8 Debugging Multiple Targets For the method to debug multiple targets in synchronization refer to section 15 17 Synchronizing Multiple Debugging Platforms 15 2 Viewing a program This section describes how to look at your program as source code and assembly language mnemonics The HEW has various facilities for dealing with code and symbol information which are explained in this section and you will be shown how to look at text files in the user interface Note After a break occurs the HEW displays the
210. ion you would like to remove Click the Remove button Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box It is not possible to remove the current session 165 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 5 Making a session read only To make a session read only l Read only 1 Choose the Debug Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed 2 Select the session you would like to view the properties for Click the Properties button The properties dialog is displayed 4 Click the Read only checkbox This makes the link read only This is useful if you are sharing debugger setting files and you do not want data to be modified accidentally 5 Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box 6 Saving Session Information To save a session 1 Select the File menu from the menu bar The file menu is displayed 2 Click the Save Session menu item If you have the Prompt before saving session checkbox checked a dialog is displayed which asks you whether you wish to save the information Clicking No loses the changes you made in the session This checkbox is located in the Setup gt Options dialog on the Workspace tab To save a session with a different name 1 Choose the Debug Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed Select the session you would like to save Click the Save as button The Save Sess
211. ions for the debugger targets selected in Step 8 Configuration By default the HEW generates two configurations Release and name Debug If a debugger target is selected a configuration for the selected target is also generated an abbreviation including the target name This configuration name can be changed in Configuration name Detail options Sets the debugger target options To modify an option select Item and click Modify If the selected item cannot be modified Modify remains gray even when Item is selected Simulator I O System call for standard I O or file I O from the user program is enabled Enable or disabled Disable Simulator I O addr Address for above system call Bus mode Currently cannot be used by the simulator debugger To move to Step 9 click the Next gt button in Step 8 153 sQENESAS 15 Using the Debugger New Project 9 9 Chaneine the File Names to be Created 9 The files to be generated by the HEW based on the settings made so far is displayed as a list in Step 9 File Name File name To change a file name after selecting the file name by clicking on it enter the new file name Extension File extension The following source files will be Fenerated Description dbsect C petting of B R Section sbrk C Program of sbrk lode t ine h Definition of LO Register iIntpre sre Interrupt Program vectth SKC Initialize of Vector Table
212. ions then check the Regular Expressions checkbox See Reference 3 Regular Expressions for further information If you clicked the Find Next button the editor will search for the first occurrence of the search string Click the Replace button if you want to replace it Click Replace All button to replace all occurrences or click the Cancel button to stop the replace action If you select Selection in the Replace In field the replace action will be performed in the range of the selected text If you select Whole File the replace action will be performed on the whole file If you select All Open Files all files that are currently open in the editor will have the replace operation carried out on them Jumping to a Specified Line To jump to a line in a file l 2 3 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to replace is the active window Select one of the following operations to display the Goto dialog Press CTRL G OR Select the Edit Goto Line menu option OR Select Goto Line from the Editor window s pop up menu Goto Line number il Cancel Enter the number of the line that you want to jump to into the Line Number box and then click the OK button 4 The insertion cursor will be placed at the start of the line number specified 4 7 Bookmarks When working with many large files at a time it can become difficult to locate specific lines or areas of interest Bookmarks enable you to specify lines th
213. iple projects and All projects items to change a components load status over more than one project If you select a combination which means the component is loaded in one project and not anther then the intermediate state icon is displayed 86 CENESAS 5 Tools Administration 5 9 Custom project types The Project gt Create Project Type menu item in HEW and allows you to create a template for your project This menu item takes the settings of the current project and then creates a project type for you The user can specify the name of the new type and the style of the Project Generation Wizard Once created these project types appear in the Tools Administration dialog and are initially hidden in the System Components part of the Tools Administration tree To export one of the Custom Project Generators select the Export button on the Tools Administration dialog The export functionality packages the Custom Project Generator into a binary file which includes an executable This can be given to another user who then runs the executable This installs the Project Generator into the correct location on the target user s machine Note A project template can be created by selecting Project gt Create Project Type based on the project in use This template includes the version information of the toolchain When a project is created by using this template after the toolchain version has been updated in your HEW system check
214. is options dialog Compare Files Advanced Options Advanced gnore blanks Cancel 5 Click Compare To perform a difference comparison with a local file and a file in SourceSafe 1 Ensure the SourceSafe component is enabled Also note that the file must be have been added into the version control system 2 Select Tools gt Show Differences The Compare Files dialog is displayed Ensure the Compare with version control radio button is enabled 4 Enter the first file to compare You can either select a previous difference comparison or browse to a new file 5 Clicking the Advanced button displays the Compare Files Advanced Options dialog This allows you to perform the difference comparison without taking white space into account Click OK when you are finished with this options dialog 6 Click Compare 131 2CENESAS 11 Comparing Files The Difference window is displayed 11 1 Opening the Difference window Continue from the previous sections steps The Difference window is displayed The two files being compared are loaded into each side of the split view Their names are at the top of each window Configuration of Difference window Difference Toolbar P ba gih by fh CONHE Workspace MiC APF 4007 001M 6C_ CNHEWSWorkspace scH4 Demo SHd Demo SH 52 52 j void main void void main void 55 55 36 Option Clicking the right hand mouse button displ
215. isplay in binary Copy Places a copy of the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard Save As mj Saves the currently displayed contents Go To Memory a Opens a Memory window for the address Toolbar display Showing hiding toolbar buttons Customize toolbar Customizing toolbar buttons 220 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger b Adding a Watch Item Use the Add Watch dialog box in the Watch window to add Watch items to the Watch window To use Add Watch from a Watch window Open the Watch window Choose Add Watch from the pop up menu The Add Watch dialog box opens Add Watch Vanable or espressioni Cancel IO Fa x Enter the name of the variable that you wish to watch and click OK The variable is added to the Watch window A variable can be dragged from the Editor window and dropped into the Watch window Note If the variable that you have added is a local variable that is not currently in scope the HEW will add it to the Watch window but its value will be Not available now c Expanding a Watch Item If a watch item 1s a pointer array or structure then you will see a plus sign expansion indicator to left of its name this means that you can expand the watch item To expand a watch item click on it The item expands to show the elements in the case of structures and arrays or data value in the case of pointers indented by one tab stop and the plus sign changes t
216. itch desktop configurations There are a number of ways to switch desktop configuration The first and easiest method is using the virtual desktop buttons located on the status bar These are shown below Build desktop Read write S67 4 In this example the selected desktop is number This has been given the name Build by the user Its description is seen in the edit box to the right on the buttons Clicking a different desktop selects that button and changes the description control Once clicked HEW then loads the windows in the new configurations style Another method of changing the desktop configuration is as follows 1 Click the Window gt Virtual Desktop menu item Select is cascaded menu 2 Then select the desktop configuration you wish to view on this menu The selected item 1s ticked 3 Select the menu item and the setup is altered automatically 103 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 104 2CENESAS 7 Version Control 7 Version Control The High performance Embedded Workshop provides facilities for connecting to version control tools Some of the reasons why version control tools are used with a project are e To maintain the integrity of a project e To store each stage of a project e To enable different users to co develop a project by controlling revisions to its source files Figure below illustrates a typical project where a version control system is in use This shows three users who all u
217. just before it 1s about to execute it If you choose to Go or Step after stopping at the PC breakpoint then the highlighted line will be the next instruction to be executed When multiple targets are debugged it is possible to specify either or both of them is stopped For details refer to section 15 17 Synchronizing Multiple Debugging Platforms To change the PC breakpoint setting by using the Breakpoints dialog box The breakpoint dialog can be displayed by selecting the Edit Breakpoints menu option It allows you to view the current breakpoints set in the workspace and view the code associated with each one From this dialog it is also possible to remove one or all breakpoints To toggle PC breakpoints It is possible to toggle PC Breakpoints either by double clicking in the breakpoint BP column of the line at which the PC breakpoint is set or by placing the caret on the line and using the F9 key The display will cycle through the available standard breakpoint types a red circle will be shown in the gutter 203 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 14 Status window To check the configuration and status of the debugging platform in the Status view click the View Status button re or choose the View Status menu item Configuration of Status window status Memory Mode None Target Device Configuration OOOOOOO0 O7FFFFFF EXT 2 O0000000 27FFFFFF EXT S Q0000000 47FFFFFF EXT COOOQOO000 COOOOFFF EXT FFFFSOOO
218. ke the HEW to automatically open the last workspace when it is launched 3 Click the OK button to confirm the new settings W Open last workspace at start up 6 8 2 Restore files on opening a workspace When you close a workspace the HEW stores the names of the files that were open at that time When you open a workspace the HEW can restore i e open the same files so that you can continue your session in exactly the same state as when you left it If you would like the files associated with a workspace to be opened when the workspace is opened then set this checkbox To restore files on opening a workspace 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Setup Options dialog will be displayed Select the Workspace tab 2 Set the Restore files on opening workspace checkbox if you would like the files associated with a workspace to be opened when the workspace is opened 3 Click the OK button to confirm the new settings J Restore files on opening workspace 6 8 3 Display workspace information on opening a workspace When many workspaces are being used it is sometimes difficult to remember exactly what is contained within each workspace To help resolve this the High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to enter a textual description of each workspace This description can be displayed whenever a workspace is opened 98 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment To enter a workspace description 1 Select t
219. l To add a new environment variable click the Add button the Environment Variable dialog is displayed Enter the variable name into the Variable field and the variable s value into the Value field and then click the OK button to add the new variable to the list To modify an environment variable select the variable from the list and then click the Modify button Make the required changes to the Variable and Value fields and then click the OK button to add the modified variable to the list To remove environment variables select the variable that you want to remove from the list and then click the Remove button 40 CENESAS 3 Advanced build features Environment arnable Ei Vanable OF a Pa Value __ Cancel Po If the tool you are adding can display its output whilst the tool is running then use the Read Output on Fly option This will display the tool output as each line of output happens If this option is set to off then the HEW will store all output that is being displayed by the tool and display it in the Output window when the tool has finished its operation This can be a problem when the tool is running an operation that might take many minutes as it is difficult to see the progress of the current execution Note Using Read Output on Fly can cause problems when using certain tools on certain operating systems If you are having problems with tools locking up or freezing in HEW then uncheck the Read
220. l execution All output is directed to the output window as in the case of the normal build If you are using a toolchain supported by HEW errors and warnings can be double clicked to jump to the source files The help link should also be supported Note when using the HMAKE exe system the build all button will pass a command to HMAKE to force a re build all operation 52 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features 3 11 Customizing the HEW linkage order Object modules are linked as alphabetical order in HEW default You can specify the linkage order if you wish to To switch on manual linkage order facilities l rA 3 Intermediate file File in project User library from options Click the Build gt Linkage Order menu item On the Linkage Order dialog displayed click the Use custom linkage order check box Then you can move the objects into which ever order you need Simply select the module and click the Move to top Move up Move down and Move to bottom buttons to position it in the desired location Each module has a different icon depending on where it originated from This is shown below Click OK to verify and save the settings Linkage Order Object order Cancel main obj resetorg obj 4 Intprg aby J runtine_library lib Move up projectname lib Ge uset_edit_options lib vee ane Mave tatap Mowe to bottan Curent configuration Debug Copy to Wh
221. l check the return code of each command to determine whether a failure occurred If this is the case no further commands will be executed and any other processes which would follow the commands e g build will not be executed If the Return code of tool is not meaningful option is selected then the HEW will not check the return code of each command Consequently all commands will execute regardless 8 3 Specifying Arguments It is obvious that arguments must be specified correctly otherwise the version control tool executed will not function as intended However it is also important when using custom version control support to specify the arguments in a flexible way as a single version control command can be applied to more than one file To facilitate this the Arguments field has a placeholder button see Reference 4 Placeholders for an in depth discussion of placeholders which when clicked on invokes a pop up menu of all available 111 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System placeholders An explanation of each version control placeholder and how their values are derived can be found in the table below Placeholder Value And How It Is Determined User login name Current user login General tab User login password Current user password General tab Version control directory Virtual version control mapping Projects tab Comment Comment specified before command execution File path name Full path an
222. l eg demol E is demol ae C Contig a SimsessionsH 4 SH 4 Simulator O DefaultSession El Igy demaz DefaultSession Z oimoessionaH 4 SH 4 Simulator Un synchronize session To use internal HEW synchronization l 2 Note Follow the options as specified in to setup internal HEW synchronization Click on the session combo box located on the standard toolbar Select the Synch Debug selection This option is only available when synchronized debugging has been added to the system Once selected the HEW debugger enables the Synchronized debugging facilities This means the addition of another toolbar this is named Sync session The enable disable toolbar button on the Synch session toolbar allows you to temporarily switch off the synchronization without losing your settings for this feature When enabled changing the session in the Sync session combo box changes the session you are currently viewing In the normal HEW debugging state this would mean the session is closed In Synch session you can have multiple sessions open and the currently selected one on this toolbar is the session you are viewing This system allows you to debug multiple targets or CPU cores simultaneously Changing the session changes the views you can see on the screen and the data displayed on these views standard ay MC SESS zio iF a EA Sim essontH 4 5 Enable Disable Synchronized debugging session list synchronized debugging
223. laced after the last character in the template as in a normal paste operation There are 10 shortcut keys reserved for templates If you want to designate one of these select the key in the drop list at the bottom of the edit template dialog These range from ALT 0 to ALT 9 Menu Entry Placeholder Replaced With Time TIME Current time Date as DMY DATE DMY Current date in dd mm yy form Date as MDY DATE MDY Current date in mm dd yy form Date as YMD DATE_ YMD Current date in yy mm dd form Date as Text DATE_TEXT Current date in text form Line LINE First line number of template insertion User USER Current Windows user File FULLFILE Name of the file Project Name PROJNAME Current project name Workspace Name WORKSPNAME Workspace name Cursor Position Insertion cursor positions the cursor in this position after 4 13 2 Deleting a Template To delete a template template has been inserted 1 Select one of the following operations to display the Define Templates dialog e Click on the Define Template toolbar button T OR e Select the Edit gt Templates Define Templates menu option OR e Right click and select the Templates Define Templates menu option from the pop up menu 2 Use the Template Name drop down list to select the name of the template you wish to remove and then click the Remove button 3 Clicking the OK button saves the changes and closes the dialog 4 13 3 Insertin
224. lar expression or sub expression is anchored at the end of the input string For example ab matches ab and cab but not abc Denotes alternation or the creation of a set of equally valid alternate expressions or sub expressions each of which can be matched For example ab cd matches ab or cd Matches any code unit except for those which indicate the logical end of a line 243 2CENESAS 3 Regular Expressions Find in files These characters are listed in the table below and explained underneath Character n t 244 Function This character matches any single character except the newline character 29 66 For example t p matches top tip but not trap This character matches any number of occurrences 0 or more of any character except a newline Thus this character will not match across new lines The character will match as few occurrences as are necessary to make the rest of the pattern match For example t o matches the to of too the tro of trowel and the ty o of sporty orange but not smart orange because the character does not match across a new line This character matches the newline character n would be used to search for line endings or in patterns that cross line boundaries Example 1 n matches every occurrence of a newline following a semicolon Example 2 nif searches for a semicolon a new line and a line beginning with
225. le Extensions dialog will be displayed 2 Select the file group that you want to associate from the file extensions list 3 Click the Open with button The Modify File Extension dialog will be displayed Modify File Extension File group Linkage map tile Associated application Open Linkage map file with i alate a Cancel Add Tots Remove 4 Select None to remove any association Editor to open this type of file in the internal external editor or select Other to open this type of file with a specific application If you select Other you can either specify a new application or select any previously defined application from the drop down list Click the Add button to define a new application The Add Application dialog will be displayed 20 CENESAS 2 Build basics 4dd Application Nome Cancel Command texcluding parameters ee Browse Parameters Po hitial directory Po Browse Enter the name of the tool into the Name field Enter the full path to the tool in the Command field do not include any parameters Enter the parameters that are required to open a file into the Parameters field Be sure to use the FULLFILE placeholder to specify the location of the file see Reference 4 Placeholders for more information on placeholders Enter the initial directory in which you would like the application to run into the Initial directory fi
226. ll variables in real time Delete Auto Update Marks the selected variable with an outlined R and cancels realtime update Delete Auto Update All Marks all variables with outlined Rs and cancels real time update f Deleting a watch item To delete a watch item select it from the Watch view and choose the Delete option from the pop up menu The item is deleted and the Watch view is updated To delete all watch item select it from the Watch view and choose the Delete All option from the pop up menu The all items are deleted and the Watch view is updated Watch items that you have set in the Watch window are saved in the session file g Modifying the Radix The radix for the selected variable display can be modified by choosing Radix from the pop up menu h Saving the Watch Window Contents in a File To save the contents of the Watch window choose Save As from the pop up menu the Save As dialog box opens It allows the user to specify the name of a file and to save the contents of the Watch window in the file If the Append check box is selected the window contents are appended to the existing file and if it is not selected the existing file is overwritten i Opening a Memory Window The contents of the memory area to which the selected variable is assigned can be displayed in the Memory window Choosing Go To Memory from the pop up menu opens the Memory window 222 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debug
227. ll windows SHIFT DELETE Editor cut operation alternative in the editor to CTRL X SHIFT Cursor up Select the next line up SHIFT Cursor down Select the next line down SHIFT HOME Selects from the cursor to the beginning of the current line in the editor SHIFT END Selects from the cursor to the end of the current line in the editor SHIFT TAB Move the tab back in the editor SHIFT CTRL 8 Show white space characters in the editor 253 2CENESAS 7 Keyboard Shortcuts SHIFT CTRL G Open image window SHIFT CTRL K Open TCL toolkit SHIFT CTRL L Line deletion in editor SHIFT CTRL M Match braces SHIFT CTRL S Save all SHIFT CTRL T Insert template SHIFT CTRL V Open waveform window SHIFT CTRL W Select a word in the editor SHIFT CTRL END Selects from the cursor to the end of the file SHIFT CTRL HOME Selects from the cursor to the beginning of the file SHIFT CTRL Cursor left Selects the previous word in the editor SHIFT CTRL Cursor right Selects the next word in the editor None DEL Clear None ESC Halt None Fl Context sensitive help None F2 Next bookmark None F3 Find Next None F4 Find in files None F5 Go None F7 Build None F10 Step over None F11 Step in None F12 Refresh window None Cursor up Move cursor up in the editor None Cursor down Move cursor down in the editor None Cursor left Move cursor left in the editor None Cursor right Move cursor right in the editor None End Move cursor to th
228. loaded program must be selected in the Overlay dialog box 15 18 3 Looking at variables This section describes how you can look at variables in the source program 1 Tooltip Watch The quickest way to look at a variable in your program is to use the Tooltip Watch feature To use Tooltip Watch 1 Select Setup gt Options menu option Select the Editor tab The Options dialog box 1s displayed Check the Enable tooltip watch check box Click OK E M Enable tooltip watch To view a tooltip watch on the Editor window 1 Open the Source window showing the variable that you want to examine 2 Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine A tooltip will appear near the variable containing basic watch information for that variable 218 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger sortial printf i tk Sorting fori t O i lt 10 i printft alSd 21 mi nH ma 00000000 min 0 max changelaJ min a l max a l 2 Instant Watch Display the source file containing the variable that you want to examine on the Editor window Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine and choose Instant Watch from the pop up menu the Instant Watch dialog box will appear and display the variable at the cursor location Instant Watch a 1 73FFFFAC long 10 shown to the left of the variable name indicates that the informati
229. lt e dbectc The editor contains a gutter on the left hand side of the window The standard column allows the user to configure the position of bookmarks and software breakpoints quickly and easily If you are unsure what purpose a column has or what the information it is displaying is if you place the cursor over the column a tool tip 1s displayed showing its identity The editor window can be customized via the Format Views dialog box which can be invoked via the Setup gt Format Views menu option This dialog allows you to configure fonts colors tabs and so on for the editor window It also allows the user to change the look of other views which have been installed by HEW If you would prefer to use your favorite editor rather than the HEW internal editor then specify your alternative in the Options dialog box which can be invoked via the Setup gt Options menu option For further details on how to use the editor see chapter 4 Using the Editor 2CENESAS 1 Overview 1 2 6 Output window To show the Output window select the View Output menu option The Output window by default has four tabs on display x Nothing to do skipping Phase H Series Stype Converter finished Build Finished 0 Errors O Warnings al Build Find in Files A Verzion Control Use the pop up menu to clear or save the content of the window The Build tab The Build tab shows the output from any build process e g compiler
230. me as the workspace with a log extension This file will be located in the same directory as the workspace file When the Generate log for projects is clicked any projects in the current workspace that have changes made to them will be logged to a file with the same name as the project with a log extension This file will be located in the same directory as the project file The log file is updated when the workspace is saved 6 5 Configuring the help system The High performance Embedded Workshop provides context sensitive help within the Editor window In other words if you select some text in the Editor window and then press F1 the High performance Embedded Workshop will attempt to locate help on that selected item The help files that will be searched are listed in the Help tab of the Setup Customize dialog To add a new help file 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog will be displayed Select the Help tab 94 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment Help Help files Description C C Standard Library Help occhew tools renesas Remove It mE cL Default help file C C Standard Library Help 2 Click the Add button The Add Help File dialog will be displayed Enter a description of the help file into the Description field 4 Enter the full path of the help file into the File name field or browse to it graphically by clicking the B
231. me gt lt address gt lt size gt lt absolute gt lt format gt lt bitfields gt 1 lt name gt register name to be displayed 2 lt address gt address of the register 3 lt size gt which may be B W or L for byte word or long word default is byte 4 lt absolute gt which can be set to A if the register is at an absolute address This is only relevant if the I O area address range moves about on the CPU in different modes In this case if a register is defined as absolute the base address offset calculation is not performed and the specified address is used directly 5 lt format gt Format for register output Valid values are H for Hexadecimal D for decimal and B for binary 6 lt bitfields gt section defining the bits within the register Bitfield sections define the bits within a register each entry is of the type bit lt no gt lt name gt 1 lt no gt is the bit number 2 lt name gt is a symbolic name of the bit 66 99 Comment lines are allowed and must start with a character 249 2CENESAS 5 I O File Format Example Comment SH7034 Family Li Register Definitions File Modules Base ddress 0 Wodulel Power Down Mode Registers tiled u jes Meodule2 DMIA Channel _Cormmen Module OMA Oo Short Address Mode Meoduled2 Bus Controller ModuledS System Moduledd lnterrupt Controller OMA_Channel Comrmen reg regD MAW ER fev ke regi regDMAT LA Definition reg re gD W
232. mmonly used version control commands Initially when you first create a workspace these buttons are inactive because you have not yet associated any version control commands to them The toolbar buttons are equivalent to the six menu options on the Tools Version Control sub menu In other words selecting the Tools Version Control Get File s menu option will have exactly the same effect as clicking the Get File s toolbar button As the toolbar buttons themselves are fixed the only operation that you can perform upon them is to define which commands should be executed when they are clicked In order to invoke commands from the toolbar or the system defined options of the Tools gt Version Control sub menu you must first define the associated commands that should be executed when they are activated The names of the options and their intended action are listed Option Description Add File s Add selected file s to version control system Remove File s Remove selected file s from version control system Get File s Get a read only local copy of the selected file s from version control system Check In File s Put back i e update the selected file s in version control system with the local copy Check Out File s Get a writable local copy of the selected file s from version control system Status of File s View the status of the selected file s To modify the commands associated with a version control toolbar button 1 Sele
233. nable menu from the pop up menu of the memory window In the Memory window the background of the executed lines is displayed in sky blue and the background of the unexecuted lines is displayed in gray 0 1 2 3 4 5 46 7 48 9 4 E 4h i E F ASCII 00 OO OO Oo 00 OO 00 OO Ce 00 OO OO OO 00 OO 00 ho 00 0O ee 00 Of OO OO Of OO O 00 OC 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO 00 00O 00 00 00 CNL Note Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 15 3 23 Saving an area of memory You can save an area of memory in the address space to a disk file using the Save Memory feature Select an address range to save in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Save option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Save Memory As dialog box is displayed This operation can also be achieved by selecting Debug gt Save Memory save Memory as ea Cancel File name Oo Start address fooooo0o0 End address OO0000FF Access Size li If you did not drag the address range to be saved you must enter the start end address The end address can also be prefixed by a plus sign which will use the entered value as a range Enter the file format in Format file name in File name and access size in Access size The File name drop down list contains the last four filenames used for saving memory Alternatively click the Browse but
234. ne of these extensions will add the text to the file extension field automatically 4 Select the Extension belongs to new group option and enter a description that defines this new file group 5 At this stage it is possible to change the associated application There are four available choices in the Open lt extension group gt with drop down list e Editor e None e Other e Windows default If Editor is selected the Open File function in the workspace window causes the file to be opened in the HEW editor If None is selected then the Open File operation is disabled when it is attempted Selecting Other allows you to configure another tool for the Open File operation See section 2 4 1 Associating an application with a file group for more details If Windows default is selected then the Open File function in the Workspace window passes the Open File operation to the Windows Operating system This then selects the default behavior for this file extension as defined in Windows Explorer 6 Click the OK button to add the extension to the File Extensions list 22 CENESAS 2 Build basics 2 4 3 Creating a new file extension If your files use a different extension from those accepted by the HEW for a given phase e g your assembler source files are asm but the HEW only recognizes src then you need to create a new extension and add it to an existing file group This process is described below To create a new file ext
235. ng the workspace For further information about saving a workspace before executing phases see section 6 8 4 Save workspace before executing any phases To display a prompt before saving the workspace 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Tools Options dialog will be displayed Select the Workspace tab 2 Set the Prompt before saving workspace checkbox 3 Click the OK button to confirm the new settings If Prompt before saving workspace 99 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 6 8 6 Prompt before saving session Checking this option will force the High performance Embedded Workshop into displaying a prompt before the session is saved to disk J Prompt before saving session 6 8 7 Auto backup facilities The HEW supports the facility to backup the workspace project and session files at regular intervals This means that if your application or development system should fail you will not lose so much work Any changes you have made will be saved to temporary files When re opening the workspace you will be prompted and asked if you wish to auto recover the files that were not saved during your last session To enable auto file backup facilities 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Workspace tab This dialog is shown below 2 Set the Save Auto Recovery info checkbox as necessary This should default to on 3 Select the number of mi
236. nload modules Resets the microprocessor Starts executing the user program at the current PC Executes the user program from the reset vector address Starts executing the user program at the current PC and continues until the PC equals the address indicated by the current text cursor position Changes the value of the Program Counter PC to the address at the row of the text cursor Launches the Run Program dialog box allowing the user to enter temporary breakpoints before executing the user program Opens the Editor or Disassembly window at the address of the PC Executes a block of user program before breaking Executes a block of user program before breaking If a subroutine call is reached then the subroutine will not be entered Executes sufficient user program to reach the end of the current function Launches the Program Step dialog box allowing the user to modify the settings for stepping Steps only one source line when the Editor window is active When the Disassembly window is active stepping is executed in a unit of assembly instructions Executes stepping in a unit of assembly instructions Steps only one source line Stops the execution of the user program Disconnects the debugging platform and connects it again Connects the debugging platform Disconnects the debugging platform Saves the specified memory area data to a file Verifies file contents against memory contents
237. no workspaces are open and then select the Tools Administration menu option If you attempt to access the Tools Administration dialog when a workspace is open the Tools Administration dialog is opened but cannot be modified When HEW 1s installed any new tools are automatically registered Day to day usage of the HEW though may mean you need to know more about the tools registration process 78 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration HEW stores tool information in a tool database file which is stored in the root of the tool installation directory By default this is set to the HEW application directory however if you are working in a network environment this directory may be set to another location It is possible to change the tool directory location and this causes a re scan of the tools that are registered in HEW To change the tools directory location 1 Select the Tools Administration menu option 2 Click the Modify button which is next to the Current HEW Tools Database Location field 3 Browse to the root directory of the new tool location and click the OK button 4 This will switch the directory and change the tool location to the new directory It will be necessary to scan for any new tools that may be in this location This can be achieved by using the Search Disk or Register Tool functionality 5 3 Registering a Component The HEW will automatically attempt to register any new components installed since the last t
238. ntrol Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive This can only be done if another user has not already checked out the file s in question To check out a writable copy of a file s from Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s that you would like to check out from Visual SourceSafe in the Workspace window You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof xi 2 Click the Check Out Files toolbar button or select the Tools gt Version Control Check Out Files menu option 9 2 4 Checking In a Writable Copy of a File into Version Control Visual SourceSafe protects your source files and ensures that only one user can have a writable copy of a controlled file at any one time The check out operation takes a writable copy of the file from Visual SourceSafe and places it on your local drive Once a file is checked out it is edited and then checked back in so that the edits can be made available to other users 121 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe To check in edits made to a file s in Visual SourceSafe 1 Select the file s that you would like to check back into Visual SourceSafe You may also select a file folder project folder workspace folder or combination thereof
239. ntsavadanadunsiaveiavsadadivaieetsanadiiedunsieueievenensds 44 3 4 1 601 10 coal D a E T E TE E ET E TE T TOET T 45 3 4 2 Output Files Ta ccccsccescsasccdscsnsteasesn sens sesasecasasatuedecsnsdeanena tee sasasuceeqsasucdeqsnsieasenntetisesaancetanvasanieds 45 3 4 3 Dependent Files TaD eee een eR eee eee eee ree eer ern 46 3 5 EGD e A ee ee eee 47 B36 Controlling THE DUAN ys dossisescseageencesteiecesseevesdontacexahesqeencontaiesenaccexdonkeninchicitergasotanersnneman ees 48 r Logline build ouit asses smote asa E 49 3 8 Changino TOON Maiti VefsiONsessieerisinrri iind e E E AE NE NE EENE EEE 49 3 9 Generating a Makefile cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 50 3 10 Using makefiles to build inside HEW 0 cc cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 52 3 11 Customizing the HEW linkage O10 vs csecicircscnincsnsericewnstsdenwnneradezniseincvead aadwnidiasesnnasadepesaionsarceoreees 53 Ae URDANETA EE toutes naseiacseesanasensseneeeee outa ests ots E 55 4 1 Py Wet sates ssn E aun sneneutn meee nanaieinceneaataeane daacanar unetaneated 55 4 2 Integrated disassembly view in the CditOr ccccccccccccccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 56 4 3 Working with Multiple Files cc cccccssseccceececececeeeeceeaceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseseeseeeeseeeeess 56 4 4 Standard File Operations ssssssssssseesssesssssssse
240. nu option in the Build menu To specify options for that phase select it The dialog that will be displayed depends on whether the custom phase selected was multiple or single according to the selection of phase type when it was created in the New Build Phase wizard HyPhase Options Fx Debug Options Output Files Dependent Files E sH4demo Lommand A E C source file C Tools MyT ool ene dbsct c Options FLILLFILE Z reselprg c E sbrk c E SH4demo c a 7 Default Options aa aalign Fie path name Inzert Cancel 44 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features If the phase selected was multiple then a list of project files 1s displayed on the left hand side of the dialog to enable you to specify the build options on a file by file basis If the phase selected was single then there is no project file list displayed In either case the three tabs below are available This is where you can set the options that you want to apply to the selected file s You can also choose which configurations are being viewed In the configuration list each configuration is listed along with a special entry named Multiple configurations If you select Multiple configurations then the Select project configurations to modify dialog is displayed which allows you to select more than one configuration This method is used throughout HEW for modifying multiple configurations at once 3 4 1 Options Tab Thi
241. nu to paste the selected placeholder to the cursor location This function is only available when the cursor is located on the last line Placeholder sub menu Placeholder Configuration directory CONFIGDIR Configuration name CONFIGNAME Project directory PROJDIR Project name PROJECTNAME Workspace directory WORKSPDIR Workspace name WORKSPNAME HEW Installation directory HEWDIR 143 2CENESAS 14 Using the Command Line 14 9 Select All Selects all contents output in the Command Line window 14 10 Copy Only available if a block of text is highlighted This copies the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard allowing it to be pasted into other applications 14 11 Paste This option pastes the content of the Windows clipboard to the current cursor location This option can only be used when the cursor is at the last line 144 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 Using the Debugger The HEW Debugger is a Graphical User Interface designed to ease the development and debugging of applications written in C C and assembly language for Renesas microcomputers Its aim is to provide a powerful yet intuitive way of accessing observing and modifying the debugging platform in which the application is running Key Features e Windows GUI for debugging e Intuitive interface e On line help e Common Look amp Feel Notes e For detailed information about debugging platform hardware please ref
242. nutes you wish the auto backup facility to be launched J Save Auto Recovery info every fo ES minutes Restoring your files If you open your workspace and the following dialog is displayed it means that the last time the workspace was used problems were encountered HEW Workspace Auto Recovery ea HEW tailed to shutdown correctly the last time you used this workepace Would you like to recover the following files rather than Use the sawed versions demo hws chew demo de mo hwp chew de modemo defaultsession haf c Shew de modemo simsessionsh 3 chew demoa dema To recover the files check the checkbox alongside the filenames you wish to recover and click OK Clicking cancel will discard the auto recovery files and load from the original files 100 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 6 8 8 Default directory for new workspaces When a new workspace is created the High performance Embedded Workshop invokes the New Project Workspace dialog One of the fields on this dialog is the directory in which the new workspace will be created By default this is the root directory However it is also possible to set this default directory to another location e g C Workspaces To change the default directory for new workspaces 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Setup Options dialog will be displayed Select the Workspace tab 2 Enter the directory in which to create new works
243. o a minus sign If the elements of the watch item also contain pointers structures or arrays then they will also have expansion indicators next to them To collapse an expanded watch item click on the item again The item s elements will collapse back to the single item and the minus sign changes back to a plus sign d Editing a watch item s value You may wish to change the value of a watch variable e g for testing purposes or if the value is incorrect due to a bug in your program To change a watch item s value use the Edit Value function To edit a watch item s value Enter a value directly in the window In another way select the item to edit by clicking on it you will see a flashing cursor on the item Choose Edit Value from the pop up menu The Edit Value dialog box opens 221 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Edit alue 7 Expression g Current H O000E67d4 F3FFFFAC Value New Value Cancel it Enter the new value or expression in the New Value field and click OK The Watch window is updated to show the new value e Specifying Realtime Update The R mark shown to the left of each variable indicates whether the variable is updated in real time A pop up menu containing the following options is available in the Watch window Auto Update Marks the selected variable with a bold R and updates the variable in real time Auto Update All Marks all variables with bold Rs and updates a
244. o build and debug in the same application Version control support The High performance Embedded Workshop has been designed with two key aims firstly to provide you the user with a set of powerful development tools and secondly to unify and present them in a way that is easy to use About This Manual This manual describes the High performance Embedded Workshop system This manual describes information on the basic look and feel of the High performance Embedded Workshop and customizing the High performance Embedded Workshop environment and detail the build and the debugging functions common to the High performance Embedded Workshop products Figure in the High performance Embedded Workshop part are those of the SH series For detailed information about debugging platform refer to the separate Debugging Platform User s Manual This manual does not intend to explain how to write C C or assembly language programs how to use any particular operating system or how best to tailor code for the individual devices These issues are left to the respective manuals Note The High performance Embedded Workshop does not run on Windows 3 1 and Windows 95 Document Conventions This manual uses the following typographic conventions Convention Meaning Menu gt Menu Option gt is used to indicate menu options for example File gt Save As FILENAME C Uppercase names are used to indicate filenames enter this string
245. o integrate with HEW 1 Firstly the location of the debugger executable must be specified This may have been configured by the installation program or a project generation utility 2 The second item of data are the command line options This field allows additional options to be specified which can modify the behaviour of the external debugger 3 Finally the location of the download module is required This allows the HEW to automatically switch to the debugger when the download module changes after a build 15 17 Synchronizing multiple debugging platforms Multiple debugging platforms can be operated at the same time in the HEW There are two methods available to achieve this These are outlined below the external method was available in HEW 2 x The Internal synchronization of debugger targets is the new preferred method for multiple target debugging in HEW 3 1 15 17 1 External HEW synchronization Initiating a HEW from another HEW synchronizes multiple debugging platforms The HEW that initiates another HEW is called the master and the initiated HEW is called the slave Choose Tools gt Launch Slave HEW or click the Launch Slave HEW toolbar button w to initiate a slave HEW The slave HEW has the same functionality as the master HEW The slave HEW is notified of the following actions done in the master HEW to ensure synchronization of the slave HEW and the master HEW e Reset go e Go e Stop debugging Note The maste
246. of the file which you wish to remove a column from and the editor pop up is displayed Click the Columns menu item and a cascaded menu item appears Each column is displayed in this pop up menu If the column is enabled it will have a tick next to its name Clicking on the entry will toggle whether the column is displayed or not 4 16 Tooltip Watch The quickest way to look at a variable in your program is to use the Tooltip Watch feature To use Tooltip Watch l a le Select Setup gt Options menu option Select the Editor tab The Options dialog box 1s displayed Check the Enable tooltip watch check box Click OK M Enable tooltip watch To view a tooltip watch on the Editor window l fA Open the Source window showing the variable that you want to examine Rest the mouse cursor over the variable name that you want to examine A tooltip will appear near the variable containing basic watch information for that variable sortial printf t Sorting forg i 0 i lt 10 i printf alSd 31 m r amp maJ 00000000 min max 0 changelaJ min a l max alLlOl 73 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 17 Smart edit capability in the HEW editor Another feature of the High performance Embedded Workshop is its smart edit facility This is enabled by default for all C source files This feature allows the HEW editor to access C navigation information and provide auto completi
247. og box in which a log file to store the command execution results can be specified Open Log File Log File Pe Browse gt Cancel Enter the name of a log file log The logging option is automatically set and the name of the file is shown on the window title bar Opening a previous log file will ask the user if they wish to append or overwrite the current log 14 6 Starting or Stopping Logging Choose Logging from the pop up menu to toggle logging to file on and off When logging is active the button becomes effective Note that the contents of the log file cannot be viewed until logging is completed or temporarily disabled by clearing the check box Re enabling logging will append to the log file 14 7 Entering a Full Path to the File It is recommended that the full path to a file is specified as a file name in the Command Line window because the current directory can be moved However care must be taken to enter the correct full path to a file when it is entered from the keyboard To save this trouble a full path can be easily specified by browsing through files Choose Browse from the pop up menu to open the Browse dialog box Select a file and click Open to paste the full path to the selected file to the cursor location This option can only be used when the cursor is located on the last line 14 8 Pasting a Placeholder Select a placeholder from the Placeholder submenu in the pop up me
248. oject abs a Dependencies Download module Dependent file 5 E Vect Inc Load project Unload project Unload project Projects A Select a workspace on the Projects tab of the workspace window and click the right mouse button This opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Options Insert Project Version Control Configure View Properties 14 Function Add project to workspace Executing version control tool Configuring the workspace view Display workspace properties 2CENESAS 2 Build basics Select a project on the Projects tab of the workspace window and click the right mouse button This opens a pop up menu containing the available options Pop up Menu Options Function Build Build Build out of date project files Build All Build project files regardless of whether the project files are out o date Update All Dependencies Update all dependencies Set as Current Project Set as current project Remove Project Remove project from workspace Unload Project Unload the selected project OR OR Load Project Load the selected project Add Files Add file s to a project Remove Files Remove file s from project Add Folder Add folder to a project Version Control Executing version control tool Configure View Configuring the workspace view Properties Display project properties Select a folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window and click the right mouse button This opens
249. ol loading is complete a confirmation message box may be displayed showing how many symbols have been loaded this can be switched off in the Confirmation sheet on the HEW Options dialog box 7 Saving Labels into a File Choose Save As from the pop up menu to open the Save Symbols dialog box The Save Symbols dialog box operates like a standard Windows Save File As dialog box Enter the name for the file in the File name field and click Save to save the HEW s current label list to a symbol file The standard file extension for symbol files is sym See Reference 6 Symbol File Format for symbol file format Once a file is specified by the Save As menu the current symbol table can be saved in the same symbol file just by choosing Save from the pop up menu 8 Searching for a Label Choose Find from the pop up menu to open the Find Label dialog box Find Label 2 Address Bl Cancel Match caze Enter the label name that you wish to find into the edit box and click OK or press the Enter key The HEW searches the label list for a label name containing the text that you entered 214 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Note Only the label is stored by 1024 characters of the start therefore the label name must not overlap mutually in 1024 characters or less Labels are case sensitive 9 Searching for the Next Label Choose Find Next from the pop up menu to find the next oc
250. olders and their meanings along with an example of their use Placeholder FULLFILE FILEDIR FILENAME FILELEAF EXTENSION WORKSPDIR WORKSPNAME PROJDIR PROJECTNAME CONFIGDIR CONFIGNAME HEWDIR TCINSTALL TOOLDIR TEMPDIR WINDIR WINSYSDIR EXEDIR USERNAME PASSWORD VCDIR COMMENT LINE Meaning Filename including full path File directory Filename excluding path including extension Filename excluding path and extension File extension Workspace directory Workspace name Project directory Project name Configuration directory Configuration name HEW installation directory Toolchain install directory on option dialog Tool installation directory Tools Administration Temp directory Windows directory Windows system directory Command directory User login Version control User password Version control Virtual version control directory Comment Version control Line number of an error warning In the table above we are assuming that e a file path is c hew workspace project file srce Expanded placeholder example c hew workspace project file srce c hew workspace project file sre file STC c hew workspace workspace c hew workspace project project c hew workspace project debug debug c hew c hew toolchains renesas sh 5 1 1 c hew toolchains renesas sh 5 1 1 c temp c windows c windows system
251. omponent may only be uninstalled if it is not currently registered with the HEW If you attempt to uninstall a tool that is registered you will be asked to uninstall the tool first High performance Embedded Workshop not uninstall a tool that is registered with HEW IN POPC AC ACHAEA CACAO MOMMA Toolchant A MS curently registered you may Please use the administration dialog to unregister the Tool You must then return to the Tools Administration dialog accessed by selecting the Tools gt Admunistration menu option unregister the tool and then invoke the Tool Uninstaller again If the selected tool is not registered with the HEW the Confirmation dialog will be displayed when the Uninstall button is clicked This dialog displays all of the files and folders that will be deleted If you are certain that these files and folders can be deleted then click the OK button To abort the uninstallation click the Cancel button 83 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration Confirmation 7 The following files and folders will be deleted CAHEW T oolstA enesast Shi A a bin CAHEWAT oolsSA enesastS hin W Ctemp CAHE W Tools AenesasS he XX hem CAHEW T oolstA enesast Shit OW A include CAHEW Tools Aenesas She LIB CNHEW Tools AenesassS hx 8 Noh oe hrf CNHEW T ools AenesasvSh Sx Ssh XK hut CAHEW T oolstA enesass Shin XS hy tenw bat CAHE Ww Tools AenesasS he W bA SMSH EE CAHEWA T ools A enesast Shi R bin badrash a
252. on displays a pop up menu containing available options Pop up menu options Function Radix Hex Display in hexadecimal Dec Display in decimal Oct Display in octal Bin Display in binary Banko 1 Display registers of bank 0 Bank 1 Display registers of bank 1 Layout Radix Switches display or non display of radix FLAGs Switches display or non display of flags display area Settings Chooses a register to be displayed Edit Changes a register s contents Split Splits up the window Display Save To File Saves register contents in a text file 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 15 7 2 Changing the Register Display Radix You can change the display radix by register To do this click the mouse right button on the register to be changed and select the display radix from the pop up menu which is opened The followings can be selected Hex Display in hexadecimal Dec Display in decimal Oct Display in octal Bin Display in binary 15 7 3 Switching Register Bank Immediately after opening the Register window the register data for the bank corresponding to the value of flag is displayed To reference the register data of Bank1 select Bank1 menu option with the Register window active The register specific to Bank1 is displayed in the gray background Example of M16C family debugger 194 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 1 BANK Reeister Window Name Value RO OOOO Ri
253. on help when using C classes and member functions To view the Smart edit status 1 Click on the Setup gt Options menu item 2 Select the Editor tab of the tools options dialog 3 The Enable Smart edit for C files should be checked 4 Click OK W Enable Smart edit for G files With this option switched on if you are working on a C file the smart edit capability should be enabled Note If the C Class navigation category has been switched off the Smart edit capability of HEW will not be active During normal usage the following editor operations will make the smart edit facilities visible e If you are using an object and are trying to access the members using the or gt If you do this a pop up will be displayed which may help you select the correct member more efficiently than typing Whilst typing the pop up will keep track of the keys you have pressed to help your selection If you press return then the currently selected member will be added This pop up is also used when using the method and it is displayed in figure below class Sample p sam Posam new sample p sam 3 fc amp joample 6 chanee sa m_nButton aay m_nDialog qy m_nF ile ag m_nLine amp jmnPace Sm nsheet SER on a e 74 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor If you are trying to use a C function then the dialog in Figure below is displayed when the first open bracket is entered This dialog allows yo
254. on management and peripheral function are not displayed on the toolbar Toolbars can be created modified and removed via the Tools Customize menu option see the chapter 6 Customizing the Environment for further information CENESAS 1 Overview Editor toolbar Save File Copy Match Braces Open File Save All Cut Paste New File Print csHa te H Standard toolbar Build Stop Build Launch Launch B pa C o erent pessian External Slave Build File Gut ia onfiguration Debugger HEW Default Window toolbar View Workspace View Disassembly Commpare Wie Command Line files Output TEL pe Search toolbar Find In Files Find Find Previous Search String Find Next i JA A Bookmarks toolbar Next Bookmark Previqus Bookmark Toggle Bookmark Remove All Bookmarks LL c cA d Templates toolbar Define Templates Insert Template Template Selection l T aT Debug toolbar This toolbar is only available when a session is being used which has a target attached Enable Disable Breakpoint Toggle Decimal Binan Disconnect Breakpoint Hex Octal Connect OE i z PR 2CENESAS 1 Overview Debug Run toolbar This toolbar is only available when a session is being used which has a target attached Reset GPL Step Over io to Cursor step Out Reset Go set PG to cursor jo Step In Halt l ETEL EEEL M PPD p Display PC l Map toolbar Map Version Control toolb
255. on may be expanded by clicking on the variable name and indicates that the information may be collapsed Clicking Add registers the variable in the Watch window Clicking Close closes the window without registering the variable in the Watch window 3 Watch window The HEW allows you to open Watch windows which contain a list of variables and their values a Opening a Watch Window To open a Watch window click on the Watch toolbar button zl or choose View gt Symbol gt Watch if it is visible A Watch window opens Initially the contents of the window will be blank Configuration of Watch window Watch ob Re oe xX SRR O8 2S i YSFFFFBO flong 10 eS H OOOOOO00 i VaFFFFBO i longi H OOO00daa VOFFFFB4 long 219 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger e This window allows the user to view and modify C C source level variables e The contents of this window are displayed only when the debugging information available in the absolute file abs includes the information on the C C source program The variable information is not displayed if the source program information is excluded from the debugging information during optimization by the compiler In addition the variables that are declared as macro cannot be displayed e A variable can be dragged from the Editor window and dropped into the Watch window The following items are displayed Name Name of the variable V
256. onality e g CPU DLL Target platform Object reader etc Extension Component An Extension Component is a component that provides key functionality in a certain area of the HEW system These components cannot be unregistered when installed e g The HEW builder debugger and flash support 77 CENESAS 5 Tools Administration 5 1 Tool Locations The HEW maintains the locations of HEW compatible components automatically as each new tool is installed After installation the HEW stores information about the component including its location This is referred to as Registration Although initial registration is automatic during the course of development or if you want to manage the tools being used in your projects more effectively you may need to register components yourself 5 2 HEW Registration Files HRF When a HEW compatible component 1 e toolchain system tool or utility phase is installed part of its installation will include a file with the extension HRF This file called a HEW Registration File describes the component to the HEW see the figure below The process of registration refers to loading a component s HRF file into the Tools Administration dialog see the figure below In order to use a component with HEW it must first be registered see the Registering a component topic for further information The Tools Administration dialog shows all currently registered components To access it ensure
257. ons will find strings only in the paged disassembly area not the complete range 15 2 8 Changing the Label Column Width The column width of a label in the disassembly window can be changed by using the Label column width menu from the disassembly pop up menu The Label column size dialog is displayed Label column zize Label Column Size ok OF piae a Cancel Specifies the column width 4 64 of a label Click OK 171 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 2 9 Saving Disassembly Text The contents of the disassembly window can be saved by using the Save Disassembly Text menu from the disassembly pop up menu When save is selected the Save Disassembly Text Dialog is displayed that asks you the range of addresses to save Save Disassembly Text Ei Ei Start Address al End Address Bl Cancel Filename Browse Both a start and end address should be supplied You also need to specify the full filename to save the information to If needed you can browse to the file to use 15 2 10 Printing the disassembly view The disassembly window can be printed by using the standard print menu or toolbar button when it is in focus or by using the menu Print on the disassembly pop up menu When print is selected the Disassembly Print Range Dialog is displayed that asks you the range of addresses to print Disassembly Print Range Fix Sen ttics Bd End Address Bl Cancel
258. oolbar button D OR e Choose the Debug Step In menu option If you choose to step over the function the debugger will execute the call and all of the code in the function and any function calls that function may make and stop at the next line or instruction of the calling function To step over the function e Click the Step Over toolbar button P OR e Choose the Debug Step Over menu option During debugging there are occasions when you may have entered a function finished stepping through the instructions that you want to examine and would like to return to the calling function without tediously stepping through all the remaining code in the function Alternatively you may have stepped into a function by accident when you meant to step over it and so want to return to the calling function without stepping all the way through the current function You can do this with the Step Out feature To step out of the current function e Click the Step Out toolbar button F OR e Choose the Debug Step Out menu option To choose the step mode to use while stepping Choose the Debug Step Mode menu option Sub menu Function Auto Automatically chooses the step mode Assembly Steps through assembly instructions Source Steps through source code 201 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 12 6 Multiple steps Sometimes you may find it useful to step through several instructions at a time You can do this by using the Step P
259. oondnavempsbnedecenstamsenneydoncdnnveensbnieescnchamnnmpubndelb aneacinenanstouleconbaustenetetencdaanesnaeeneees 293 8 Drag and Drop in the HEW Debugger cc cccccccccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeesess 255 9 Using Labels to View Your Code cessisse eein enii a a EE TOE ERTER 257 10 Integrated Toolbars in a Components View ccccccccccccccccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 259 11 To Build in Toolchain for HEW UX ssscccsasaydecstaveiedenstesensentsavadnadniaueeadeeseedient so ENEN 261 12 HMARE U Er orre EE EE E 263 121 Command Line sesiriciesiricrereirccrcniiserereip itrenn rieure EE aeatonoa out aesesoa seeps snetaeoessacsans souebeoenoaseapedecenees 263 e T 0 e E E E EE E EE E EE E E eee 263 l2 Descripion Doe i erst ccrearacnsinasenactasarucracsa seserecadaaaaacsa EOE E E Ea E E aS 264 A4 Commenee EES EES EEE Era 266 123 Message commands eei E EEEE T TE ENEE E E EEE 266 Ix 2CENESAS Table Of Contents 2CENESAS 1 Overview 1 Overview The functions for HEW version V 4 00 00 are explained in this manual This chapter describes the fundamental concepts of the High performance Embedded Workshop HEW 1 1 Workspaces projects and files Just as a word processor allows you to create and modify documents the High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to create and modify workspaces A workspace can be thought of as a container of projects and similarly a
260. ooo000 i ooooooFF el Data Length byte Column fe Radix Hex Code lasch I Output the label column M Output the register column Z 178 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 3 9 Finding a value in memory You can find a value in memory using the Search Memory feature Select an address range to search in the Memory window by dragging the mouse Choose the Search option from the pop up menu of the memory window The Search memory dialog box is displayed Start Address joonan End Address O000F F Data fi FE search Data As 2byte W Search Equal Data Search Backward Cancel Enter a value you want to find in Data and select the data format in Search Data As Check Search Equal Data to find the exact value specified To change the search direction check Search Backward If Pattern search is selected as the search format a byte string of up to 256 bytes can be searched for The end address can also be prefixed by a plus sign which will use the entered value as a range If the data could not be found the Memory window display remains unchanged and a message box informing that the data could not be found is displayed If Search Next 1s selected from the pop up menu in the state where data has been found the search will continue from the next address Note Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 15 3 10 Changing the Display Address Us
261. oooonoenennnnnnnennssnesesssssssererrerrerererrerrrererrerererrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrrerrrens 162 e VAC VU A OAM i E E E E E E EE E A E 167 1521 yiewing the 00 6 oe eee Eei E EEEE eae EEr wee 167 15 2 2 Viewing assembly language code 0 ccccccccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 168 15 23 Disassembly lockte Mesin sosisini eini eei ii EATI TAn T EARI 170 15 2 4 Looking at a specific address cccccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 170 15 2 5 Looking at the current program counter address ccccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 170 15 2 6 Modifying assembly language code ccccccccccccesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 171 15 2 7 Disassembly find in range oe isiieccsssccecdonsceenessceeenconsaceseosccandeskanewehasg encnssaccseneancaxdeesontneeneeeexGs 171 15 2 8 Changing the Label Column Width un ccccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 171 15 29 Savine Disassembly Toxt ismimin sui eTe n TEE TIE TOE T EER 172 15 2 10 Printing the disassembly view cccccseesesesessseeseseseseseeeseeeeeseeeseseeeeessessssesssesssagaagags 172 1533 Operatint Memory eessen EE e Ea EEEE ET NEEE EAA EE EN digs ee eens 172 1531 Viewing Memory ATCA iets ccancsansvasnnduassnseduatedndededeieatendatnatdadaiuetestaindsdedeieaverdatsatdadednaseindesns 173 15 3 2 Modifying the Memory Contents
262. op up menu to display then the source program corresponding to the function which has been selected by opening the Editor window is displayed 15 16 Using an external debugger The High performance Embedded Workshop can launch an external debugger tool If you want to use another debugger then you must add it to the Tools menu The Debugger tab of the Setup Customize dialog is where the external debugger related information is configured You may wish to use an older version of the debugger if certain targets are not currently supported in the new environment Invoke it by selecting the Setup gt Customize menu option and then selecting the Debugger tab The first choice to make is which debug tool you would like to use Once this has been selected the external debugger must be configured Hitachi Debugger Interface version 4 x or greater Configuring the Hitachi Debugging Interface to integrate with HEW Renesas PD debugger Configuring the PD debugger to integrate with HEW Other external debugger Configuring an external debugger to integrate with HEW Non selected Not use the external debugger Click the Launch External Debugger toolbar button 4 to invoke the debugger with the specified session file After a build if the download module has been updated the HEW will switch back to the debugger to enable immediate debugging Whilst using an external debugger double clicking in any source window will switch back to th
263. ore than one compilation exceeds the specified number iii The build stops after the whole phase is done For example suppose you compile more than one file in a build Even though the number of errors in the first compilation exceeds 48 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features the specified number the HEW continues compilation of the other files and stops the build after finishing the whole compiler phase IV When the number of errors in one execution of a tool exceeds the specified number the number of error messages displayed on the Output window is the specified number plus one A message saying that the number of error has exceeded the specified number is NOT displayed on the Output window The same things as Stop build if the number of errors exceeds shown above hold also in Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds There is no correlation between Stop build if the number of errors exceeds and Stop build if the number of warnings exceeds They are independent 3 7 Logging build output The HEW allows you to write the results of each build to file To specify a log file 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Customize dialog will be displayed Select the Log tab 2 Set the Generate build log checkbox 3 Enter the full path of the log file into the Path field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 4 Click the OK button to confirm the new log file settings
264. orm 15 1 5 Debugger sessions The HEW allows you to store all of your builder options into a configuration This means that you can freeze all of the options and give them a name In a similar way HEW allows the user to store his debugger options in a session Later on you can select the session and all of the debugger options will be restored These sessions allow the user to specify target download modules and debug options This means that potentially each session can be targeted at a different end platform This facility can allow you to have many different sessions each with different debugger options defined For example it is possible to have each session using the same target but with slight variations in the session options This can mean it 1s very easy for the user to switch session and modify such things as register values or target settings such as clock speed The figure below shows this principle The two sessions share the same target but the sessions can be slightly different with regard to the options defined This means that both sessions can share the same download module and avoid an unnecessary rebuild This is because sessions are not directly related to the build configuration data Detaultsess ion Detaultsess lon e n A i Each session s data is stored in a separate file to the HEW project You can then manipulate the data to share or modify as is required in the project 162 CENESAS 15
265. ou select the workspace icon all of the files in all of the projects will be passed to the version control command this will include any system files 2 Select the required menu option from the Tools gt Version Control sub menu or click the desired version control toolbar button The custom version control support allows you the highest degree of flexibility in specifying how a version control system is to be used To configure it select the Tools Version Control gt Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed Commands Projects General System menu optione and toolbar buttons oe Ln re ene iss Check Out File s Get File s Remove Files Status of Filels User menu options Modit Hemose Mave tn Mase danm 107 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System The Commands tab contains two lists of menu options The first list System menu options and toolbar buttons represents the menu options that always appear on the Tools Version Control sub menu These menu options also have an associated toolbar button on the version control toolbar The second list User menu options represents those additional user defined options which are added to the bottom of the Tools Version Control sub menu 8 1 1 System menu options and toolbar buttons There are six version control toolbar buttons They provide you with a shortcut to the most co
266. ount limit in the field to the right If you want to stop the build when a certain number of warnings are exceeded then set the Stop build if the no of warnings exceeds checkbox and specify the warning count limit in the field to the right In addition to specifying error and warning count limits the Build tab also allows you to request that the Command line Environment and Initial directory of each execution should be displayed Check the appropriate check boxes as necessary Note e Irrespective of what these controls are set to the build will always halt if a fatal error is encountered e Note the following descriptions when you check the Stop build if the number of errors exceeds check box and specify a number to the controls 1 Stop build if the number of errors exceeds is not applied to a custom phase defined by a user This is applied only to system phases such as the C C Compiler the Assembler and the OptLinker supplied from Renesas ii number of errors in the statement means the number of errors output from an execution of a tool The total number of errors in more than one execution of a tool is irrelevant to Stop build if the number of errors exceeds For example the build stops when one execution of the C C Compiler outputs more than the number specified If the number of errors output from each compilation is no more than the specified number the build does not stop even though the total number of errors in m
267. our new password and confirm it in the second edit box Click OK Then click OK to save the password change CENESAS 10 Network Facilities 10 5 Using the network HEW service When you connect to a networked project for the first time the HEW automatically connects you to the correct network HEW service This is defined using machine name If the service cannot be found using the machine name in the workspace then the dialog below is shown Simply type or browse to the machine where the service is located and click OK If you want to be the server machine then leave the radio button on its default selection use local machine er Location i Local E C Remote Cra Bs Computer name Ek BroWee If you have previously been the server of a workspace then the following message will be displayed when you attempt connection to another machine Clicking OK then connects your machine to the new location High Performance Embedded Workshop akp e is registered to be shared on computer PADOSST you are registered to tun server locally do you wan to change your server registratori Note If the network is running multiple HEW workspaces with the network service enabled then a user can only access one of them at one time The only instance when this is not the case is if the same machine is serving all of the network workspaces 129 CENESAS 10 Network Facilities 130 2CENESAS 11 Comparing File
268. ow the code at the new address When an overloaded function or a class name is entered the Select Function dialog box opens for you to select a function Support for this function depends on the debugging platform For further information on this dialog see the Selecting a function topic 15 2 5 Looking at the current program counter address Wherever you can enter an address or value into the HEW you can also enter an expression If you enter a register name prefixed by when the SH H8 or R8C E7 E8 family is in use or when the M32C M32R M16C or R8C excluding E7 E8 family is in use the contents of that register will be used as the value in the expression Therefore if you open the Set Address dialog box and enter the expression PC or PC the Source or Disassembly view display will go to the current PC address It also allows you to go to an address using an offset from the current PC by entering an expression including the PC register and an offset e g PC 0x100 or PC 0x100 Sometimes it 1s difficult to know the exact location of the PC in your user program To automatically display the PC click the Display PC toolbar button c or select the Debug gt Display PC menu item This will open the editor or disassembly at the current PC 170 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 2 6 Modifying assembly language code You can modify the assembly language code in the disassembly view by
269. paces into the Default directory for new workspaces field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 3 Click the OK button to confirm the new settings Default directory for new workspaces CAH EM Browse 6 9 External editor The High performance Embedded Workshop allows you to use an external editor Once an external editor has been specified it will be launched when the following actions are performed e Double clicking on a file in the Projects tab of the Workspace window e Double clicking on an entry in the Navigation tab of the Workspace window e Double clicking on an error warning in the Build tab of the Output window e Double clicking on an entry in the Find in Files tab of the Output window e Selecting the Open lt file gt option from the Workspace window s pop up menu To specify an external editor External editor Madii 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab 2 Check the Use external editor checkbox The External Editor dialog will be displayed External Editor Command C wINNTSNOTEPAD EXE Browse Arguments to oper file FULLFILE a ces Arguments to open file at lire siFu LLFILE 101 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment Enter the path of the executable without any arguments into the Command field 4 Enter the arguments required to open a file into the Arguments to
270. per and lower case letters then check the Match Case checkbox If your search string uses regular expressions then check the Regular Expressions checkbox See Reference 3 Regular Expressions for further information The Direction radio buttons allow you to select the direction of the search Selecting Down means that the search will be performed from the insertion cursor towards the bottom of the file Selecting Up means that the search will be performed from the insertion cursor towards the top of the file Click the Find Next button to begin the search Click the Cancel button to stop the Find action Finding Text in Multiple Files To search for text in multiple files l 60 Select one of the following operations to display the Find In Files dialog e Click the Find In Files toolbar button re OR Select the Edit Find in Files menu option OR Select Find in Files from the Editor window s pop up menu 2CENESAS 4 6 3 4 Using the Editor Find In Files ki Find In files types aal abs asm bin ble c cpp cpu Sore Directory E SHE Wo workspaces H4demosSs H 4dem Match case M Search sub directories Regular expressions i Browse Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you selected text before invoking the find operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find field
271. place it with other text To replace text in a file l 2i 3 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to replace is the active window Position the insertion cursor at the point from which you want to start your search Select the Edit Replace menu option or select Replace from the Editor window s pop up menu A Replace dialog will be displayed Replace Find what hi Find Next Replace with Replace Replace In Selection if whole file C All open files T Match whole word only Match case Regular expression Replace All WU Cancel 61 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 6 4 Enter the text that you want to search for into the Find What field or select a previous search string from the drop down list box If you select text before invoking the replace operation the selected text will be automatically placed into the Find What field Enter the text that you want to replace the search string with or select a previous replace string from the drop down list box If you would like to search for character string as a whole word then click the Match Whole Word Only checkbox When this option is not selected the search will be for any string that is matched by the search string If you would like your search to be case sensitive i e to distinguish between upper and lower case letters then check the Match Case checkbox If your search string uses regular express
272. r HEW can initiate multiple slave HEW applications but slave HEW applications cannot be nested no slave HEW can initiate another slave HEW 15 17 2 Internal HEW synchronization The HEW also supports internal multiple target debugging This will allow you to connect to multiple target components in the same HEW application These targets can then be debugged simultaneously The system allows the user to setup a number of sessions with different targets Then when debugging the sessions can be synchronized so that certain events in one session can trigger the same events in the others This is very similar to that seen in the External HEW synchronization section above This facility though has the added advantage that it is easy to swap sessions and see what is happening in the same application To setup internal HEW synchronization 1 Select the Debug gt Debug Sessions menu item The Debug Sessions dialog displayed 2 Select the Synchronized Debug tab of the dialog 3 Select the sessions you wish to synchronize All currently available sessions in the workspace are displayed 209 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Click the synchronize session button The icons for these sessions should changed to checked rather than unchecked Click the Enable synchronized debugging check box to switch this facility on Click OK to verify the changes Seesions Synchronized Debug J Enable synchronized debugging Debus Target E
273. r has the highest level of access Before leaving the network dialog the administrator must set their password It is not possible to leave this dialog until this is completed This is described below Metiwork Network database access loge tmi Hassward User Fassword i select server 10 2 Setting the administrator user s password To set the administrator users password l PA 126 Continue from the previous sections steps Click the Password button This should have been enabled when the network data access was enabled The Change password dialog is displayed Change password F Admin Password Cancel Confirm Password 2CENESAS ae ee ee 10 Network Facilities The user name is read only in the top field In this case it should be Admin Type the new password into both of the fields and click OK This should set the user and password on the Network tab of Options dialog It is now possible to leave the Options dialog When the dialog is closed you are asked if you want to save the workspace and then re open it This is because the workspace must be re opened in the shared access mode If the changes are not saved then they will be lost When the workspace is re opened a dialog is displayed which asks you to log back into the system Once you have logged in a dialog is displayed which shows your current access rights For example if you are the admin us
274. r into the templates folder for quick template creation Right clicking on this view displays a pop up so that you can quickly add a new template remove the current selection and edit the current selection E Templates yp Projects 4 13 1 Defining a Template To define a template 1 Select one of the following operations to display the Define Templates dialog e Click the Define Template toolbar button aT OR e Select the Edit gt Templates gt Define Templates menu option OR e Right click and select the Templates gt Define Templates menu option from the pop up menu Define Templates Shortcuts El 2 Click the Add button A dialog is displayed which asks you to enter your chosen template name This name must be unique otherwise a duplicated template name message will be displayed and the template will not be added 70 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor If you want to modify an existing template use the Template Name drop down menu to select which template you want to modify Enter the desired text into the Template Text area You can copy text from another Editor window and then paste it into this dialog using CTRL V To insert special information when the template is inserted enter the keywords from the table below Enter to specify where the insertion cursor is to be placed after the template has been inserted If this is not specified then the insertion cursor will be p
275. racter is assumed to come after the last character in lt text to output gt Any white space between MESSAGE and lt text to output gt will be ignored There follows an example of a valid message command IMESSAGE Executing C Compiler 266 2CENESAS High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 00 User s Manual Publication Date Jan 19 2005 Rev 1 00 Published by Sales Strategic Planning Div Renesas Technology Corp Edited by Microcomputer Tool Development Department Renesas Solutions Corp 2005 Renesas Technology Corp and Renesas Solutions Corp All rights reserved Printed in Japan High performance Embedded Workshop V 4 00 User s Manual tENESAS Renesas Technology Corp 2 6 2 Ote machi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0004 Japan
276. rameters list may appear before the make file name if you wish Each parameter must be separated by at least one white space character Parameters are not case sensitive If no parameters are given and no file is given then help information will be displayed Exit codes If there are any syntax errors in the make file being executed or if any process executed whilst running the make file returns an invalid error code then hmake will exit with code 1 Otherwise hmake will exit with code 0 See below for file syntax and how to specify exit code conditions Parameters The following table shows the available parameters and their function Parameter Function A Execute all commands regardless of input output file status Equivalent to a Build All N Use status of input output files to calculate what commands need to be executed as normal and then display the commands but do not execute them Display help info 12 2 File Syntax There are four basic types of statement used in a hmake file the variable declaration the description block the comment and the message command These can be combined in any order to produce a hmake file but a variable must be declared in a variable declaration before it is used in a description block or other variable declaration The first all statement used in nmake files is not required in a hmake file Commands are executed in order as they appear in the make file Note the character is
277. ration file In the example below the SH 4 simulator debugger is assumed For details on the functions available with the debugging platform in use refer to the user s manual or help of the debugging platform 146 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Toolchain version oot 0 l Which GPU do you want to use for this project GPU Series If there is no GPU type to be selected select the GPL Type that a similar to hardware specification ar select Other Back Nets Finish Cancel 1 Select the CPU and Toolchain version in Step 1 The CPU types CPU Type are classified according to the CPU series CPU Series Select the CPU corresponding to the program to be developed because the generation file differs according to the CPU Series and CPU Type settings If there is no corresponding CPU select a CPU with similar hardware specifications or Other The following buttons at the bottom of the dialog box are the same as those in the New Project wizard dialog box Next gt Moves to the next display lt Back Returns to the previous display Finish Opens the Summary dialog box selections followed by this button are default Cancel Returns to the New Project Workspace dialog box To move to Step 2 click the Next gt button in Step 1 147 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger New Project 2 9 Option Setting specify global options Endian FPL
278. rator ISH CrC Compiler SH Assembler v O ptLinker Import Through this dialog you can create your own phases modify phases remove phases enable disable phases change the order of phases and so on 37 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features 3 2 Creating a custom build phase If you want to execute another tool before during or after a standard build process then this can be achieved by creating your own i e custom build phase To create a new custom build phase 1 Select the Build gt Build Phases menu option to invoke the Build Phases dialog 2 Click the Add button This will invoke the New Build Phase wizard dialog 3 Follow the 4 steps below To move forward and backward between steps click the Next gt and lt Previous buttons respectively Step 1 The first step asks whether you want to create an entirely new phase or whether you want to add a system phase A system phase is a ready made phase which is already defined within the toolchain you are using e g compiler assembler linker librarian etc or a utility phase e g file copy complexity analyzer etc The Add an existing system phase button is inactive if no more system phases are available Select the Create a new custom phase button to create your own build phase New Build Phase Step 1 of 4 Ei x What type of phase would you lik
279. re that the window whose contents you want to save is the active window 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Save File toolbar button E OR e Press CTRL S OR e Select the File Save menu option 3 Ifthe file has not been saved before a File Save dialog will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click the OK button to create the file with the name given in the directory specified If the file has been saved before then the file will be updated no dialog will be displayed To save the contents of an editing window under a new name 1 Ensure that the window whose contents you want to save is the active window 2 Select the File gt Save As menu option 3 A File Save dialog will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click the OK button to create the file with the name given in the directory specified 57 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor To save the contents of every open editor window 1 Select one of the following operations e Click the Save All toolbar button al OR e Select the File gt Save All menu option 2 If any of the files has not been saved before a File Save dialog will be displayed Enter a filename specify a directory and then click the OK button to create the file with the name given in the directory specified If any of the files have been saved before then that file will be updated no dialog will be displayed 4 4 3 Opening a
280. rectory but instead the HEW will link to the session location This file location was entered in step 5 and it will save all of the session data in this location Click the OK button to close the Debug Sessions dialog box It is possible to make the link to session file read only This is useful if you are sharing debugger setting files and you do not want data to be modified accidentally To import a link to an existing session file and make it read only l E a a a E Choose the Debug Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed Click the Add button The Add new session dialog box will be displayed Click the Use an existing session file radio button Enter a name for the session Browse to an existing session file location which you would like to import into the current project Click the Open and maintain link to session file checkbox Click the Make session file link read only checkbox This means that the HEW will be unable to save changes to this session and will only be able to read the data when the session is opened Use an existing session file Name Tutorial cession tile path Browse MW Open and maintain link to session file W Make session file link read only 4 Removing a session To remove a session l Note Choose the Debug Debug Sessions menu option The Debug Sessions dialog box will be displayed Select the sess
281. ress Enable or disable the current software breakpoint Set the status of editor columns Set the status of editor columns Launches the Instant Watch dialog box with the name extracted from the view at the current text cursor not mouse cursor position Starts executing the user program at the current PC and continues until the PC equals the address indicated by the current text cursor not mouse cursor position Changes the value of the Program Counter PC to the address at the row of the text cursor not mouse cursor Opens the Editor or Disassembly window at the address of the PC Opens a Disassembly view at the address mating the current source line 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 15 2 2 Viewing assembly language code If you have a source file open right click to open the pop up menu and select the View Disassembly option to open a Disassembly view at the same address as the current Source view It is also possible to view the disassembly using the new integrated disassembly view in the source file If you do not have a source file but wish to view code at assembly language level then select one of the following operations 168 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger e Click on the View Disassembly toolbar button OR e Choose the View Disassembly menu option OR e Press CTRL D The Disassembly view opens at the current PC location and shows Address Code optional
282. ress ENTER on the register to open a dialog box to modify the register contents When you have entered the new number or expression click the OK button or press ENTER The dialog box closes and the new value is written into the register 15 7 Looking at registers If you are debugging at assembly language level using the Disassembly view you will probably find it useful to see the contents of the CPU s general registers You can do this by using the Registers view 15 7 1 Opening the Register Window The Register window displays the register data and flag data You can change a register flag value from the window To open the Register window click the Registers toolbar button 4 or select the View gt CPU gt Register menu option The Register window opens showing all of the CPU s general registers and values displayed in hexadecimal Configuration of Register window OOOO001L0 OOOO00FO OOO040001 193 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger e Ifaregister flag value is changed the value is displayed in red e Double clicking the register display line opens a dialog which allows you to change a register value e Youcan change a flag value by clicking the button corresponding to the flag e The right click menu allows you to change the display radix point and the register bank Change of the register bank can be selected only when the target platform supports this function Option Clicking the right hand mouse butt
283. rogram dialog box The dialog box also provides an automated step with a selectable delay between steps Open it by choosing the Debug Step menu option The Step Program dialog box is displayed Step Program Sheps il Delay 25 seconds Cancel T Step over calls T Source level step 5 Fa e z x Steps Number of steps to be executed Delay Delay between steps when the program is automatically stepped No Refresh Prevents the update of the windows or 0 to 3 seconds can be selected in 0 5 second units Step Over Calls Selecting this box steps over function calls Source Level Step Selecting this box steps the program at the source level Click the OK button or press ENTER to start stepping 15 13 Stopping your program This section describes how you can halt execution of your application s code This section describes how to do this directly by using the Halt button and by setting breakpoints at specific locations in your code 15 13 1 Halting execution When your program is running the Halt Program toolbar button is enabled a and when the program has stopped it is disabled mr i To stop the program e Click on the Halt Program toolbar button gmi OR e Choose the Debug Halt Program menu option Your program s execution is halted with the message Break User Break displayed on the Status Bar The HEW will then update any open views The cause of the last break can also be viewed in
284. rowse button 5 Click the OK button to add the new help file to the list Add Help File RES Descriptor O K Programing m ANSI C Cancel File name C FILES HELPSANSILHLP Browse To make a help file the default choice select it from the Default Help File drop down list or set it to None if you would like to be prompted for a help file whenever F1 is pressed To remove a help file 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog will be displayed Select the Help tab 2 Select the help file to be removed and then click Remove 3 Click the OK button to confirm the new help file settings 6 6 Keyboard shortcut customization The HEW allows the keyboard shortcuts to be customized to your own preferences This means that major operations can be configured to different keys especially useful if you are migrating from a different tool To reach the keyboard shortcut customization dialog click the Setup gt Customize menu item Then when Customize dialog is invoked click the Keyboard tab 95 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment Keyboard Reset Category eer Commands Current keyboard shortcut Remove New New Workspace Open Workspace i one Import New keyboard shortcut Export None Save Workspace Close Workspace New Session Key curently assigned to Import Session 4 Cc re nF Descript
285. ruction s operand 2CENESAS 211 15 Using the Debugger Note An instruction s operand is replaced with a label name if the operand and label value match If two or more labels have the same value then the label that comes first alphabetically will be displayed 1 Listing labels To see a list of all the labels defined in the current debugger session click the View Labels toolbar button or select the View gt Symbol gt Labels menu option Configuration of Label window Label x foobar oa xX Nae do BS Column ap header e You can view symbols sorted either alphabetically by ASCII code or by address value by clicking on the respective column heading e You can quickly toggle a software break at the entry point of a function by double clicking in the BP breakpoint column Alternatively right click to show the pop up menu and select Break Option Clicking the right hand mouse button displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Toolbar bottom Function Add Adding a label Edit Editing a label Delete Deleting a label Delete All a Deleting all labels Pe Load pe Loading labels from a file Save mj Saving labels into a file Save As a Saving labels into
286. s 11 Comparing Files The High performance Embedded Workshop now has an integrated difference view This view allows detailed difference comparisons to be made with local files on the drive and also with files in the version control system In the HEW version 3 0 onwards the Visual SourceSafe component has this facility The Difference window can be invoked two ways The first is from the Show Differences menu item on the tools menu The second 1s via the workspace window pop up with the same name When using the pop up menu the current file selection 1s automatically added to the edit box Clicking the show differences menu item displays the difference view The view has a toolbar for accessing functionality too To perform a difference comparison with two files on your local drive 1 Select Tools gt Show Differences The Compare Files dialog is displayed Compare Files Browse f Compare with file on drive T ile Target file Advanced P Browse A Compare with version control 2 Ensure the Compare with file on drive radio button is enabled 3 Enter the first and second file to compare You can either select a previous difference comparison or browse to a new file 4 Clicking the Advanced button displays the Compare Files Advanced Options dialog This allows you to perform the difference comparison without taking white space into account Click OK when you are finished with th
287. s tab allows you to define the command line options that will be passed to the phase The Command field displays the command that was entered when you defined the phase Enter into the Options field the command line arguments that you would like to pass to the command If you want to insert a placeholder select the relevant placeholder from the Placeholder drop down list and then click the Insert button See Reference 4 Placeholders for more information on placeholders Options Output Files Dependent Files Command C Too le My Toolexe Options b4FULLFILE Placeholder File path name Insert button for placeholder Insert 3 4 2 Output Files Tab This tab is where you can specify the output file s that will be produced by the phase Before each file is passed into this phase the HEW checks that the output files are of a less recent date than the input file If so the phase will be executed for that file 1 e input files have been modified since the output file or files were last produced If the files are up to date then the phase will not be executed Note If no output files are specified the phase will execute regardless Options Output Files Dependent Files Output files Madir Remove 45 2CENESAS 3 Advanced build features To add an output file 1 Click the Add button The Add Output File dialog will be invoked 2 Enter the file path or browse to it us
288. se materials including product data diagrams charts pro grams and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corp without notice due to product improvements or other reasons It is therefore recommended that customers con tact Renesas Technology Corp or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp product dis tributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corp by vari ous means including the Renesas Technology Corp Semiconductor home page http www renesas com 4 When using any or all of the information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms please be sure to evaluate all informa tion as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products Renesas Technology Corp assumes no responsibility for any damage liabil ity or other loss resulting from the information contained herein 5 Renesas Technology Corp semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumst
289. se the same shared network drive to exchange source code The version control system provides access and updates to the source files NET WORE ee ee kl l err et a M 7 1 Selecting a Version Control System The Tools gt Version Control sub menu contains eight menu options but only the Tools Version Control Select option is initially available This is because a version control system is not yet active for the current workspace To select a version control system 1 Select the Tools Version Control Select menu option The Select Version Control System dialog will be displayed which lists all of the supported version control systems 2 Select the desired version control system from the Version control systems list and click the Select button The Current version control system field is changed to reflect the new selection 3 Click the OK button to confirm the selection 105 2CENESAS 7 Version Control Select Version Control System Version control systems Custom WGS Microsoft Visual Sourcesate 6 0 6 0 Cancel Hore elect Current version control syste None Once a version control tool has been selected you will notice that the other menu options in the Tools Version Control sub menu have now become available Note Only those version control systems that have been installed with the HEW will appear in the Select Version Control System
290. shortcut for in the Commands list The current shortcut is displayed in the Current keyboard shortcut field 4 Click the Remove button 5 Changes are not saved until the OK button is clicked on the Customize dialog 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment To reset all the keyboard shortcuts 1 Click the Reset button All shortcuts revert to the default settings for the currently selected keyboard layout 2 Changes are not saved until the OK button is clicked on the Setup customize dialog The keyboard shortcuts dialog allows you to import and export keyboard settings to a defined file This allows you to easily transfer settings from one machine to another To export keyboard shortcuts 1 Click the Export button 2 A standard file dialog is displayed Choose the filename to save the settings of the currently selected keyboard layout to 3 Click OK To import keyboard shortcuts 1 Select the keyboard layout you wish to replace with your imported settings in the Default keyboard layout list 2 Click the Import button A standard file dialog is displayed Choose the filename to load the keyboard layout from 4 Click OK 6 7 Scope of a Control in the Setup 6 7 1 Scope of a Control in the Customize Dialog The scope of each control in the Customize dialog box which is launched via Setup gt Customize differs This can be confusing so these have been listed below Tab Control
291. sical memory map gi 00000000 OSFFFFFF External l a 04000000 OF FFFFFF External a 08000000 OBFFFFFF External a OCOOOO00 OFFFFFFF External a 10000000 13FFFFFF External 3 a 14000000 17FFFFFF External Cancel 13 3 Zooming in the display To zoom in the display 1 Select Zoom In from the pop up menu 13 4 Setting back to the previous display To set back to the previous display 1 Select Zoom Out from the pop up menu 139 2CENESAS 13 Map 13 5 Changing the zoom mode To change the zoom mode l 2 3 4 Select Zoom Properties from the pop up menu The Custom Zoom dialog box is displayed Select the zoom mode in Select zoom Click the OK button iE Custom oom Current zoom p 65536 QOO00000 QOO0FFFF Select zoom OOOOO000 FFFFFFFF 216 OOOUO000 OFFFFFFF 256 OOOUC000 OOFFFFFF 4096 OOOU0000 OOOFFFFF B5536 OOOU0000 OOO0F FFF 1045576 aogopa QOQUOFFF 21677 216 OOOUC000 OOO000FF 13 6 Changing the map type being displayed To change the map type being displayed l Zi 3 4 140 Select Properties from the pop up menu The Map Properties dialog box is displayed Select map types you wish to display from Map type Click the OK button 2CENESAS 14 Using the Command Line 14 Using the Command Line The HEW Command Line Interpreter allows the user to control the d
292. single precision floating point Double Displaying memory as double precision floating point 16bit Fixed Displaying memory as 16bit fixed 32bit Fixed Displaying memory as 32bit fixed 24bit Accum Displaying memory as 24bit accumulate 40bit Accum Displaying memory as 40bit accumulate 15 3 20 Setting the Layout Select the layout from the followings in the pop up menu Layout of the memory window The followings can be selected Label Switch display or non display of label Register Switch display or non display of Register Code Switch display or non display of Code When the label register or code is shown the option is checked When the label register and code are hidden Address 0 H 2 O 4 5 68 7 8 49 4 B 40 0 E GF OO000000 oo 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 OOO000I0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 00 00 OOO00020 00 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO 15 3 21 Changing the number of digits displayed Choose Column menu from the pop up menu of the memory window The Set Column dialog box is displayed Set Column Ed Specify the number of digits in which you want data to be displayed 1 256 182 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 3 22 Switching display or non display of Measurement result In the memory window a display of coverage measurement is set to Disable by default To enable the display select Coverage gt E
293. special commands which can be used in a description block The cd command changes the current directory and the set command sets an environment variable which will then be in use for the duration of the make file execution Both are used in the same way as the DOS equivalents There follows some examples of valid description blocks which use these commands CHANGEDIR cdc dirl dir2 SETENV set VARI1 valuel set VAR2 value2 set VAR3 value3 It does not matter that CHANGEDIR and SETENV are not file names They will be treated as files that do not exist and so the commands will always be executed Sub command files If you wish hmake to generate a sub command file for you then the command part of the description block should be specified as follows this replaces lt commandn gt above lt command start gt lt lt lt sub command 1 gt lt sub command 2 gt lt sub commandn gt lt lt lt command end gt This will generate a sub command file in the windows temporary directory which will contain the lines lt sub command1 gt lt sub command2 gt etc This command file will be deleted once the make process has completed The name of the command file will be substituted for all the text between the two lt lt s You do not have to worry about the name of the sub command file This is generated by hmake For example c dirl filel obj c dir1 filel c c dir1 file1 h gt gcc
294. sseseessesesessesesesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeseseeeeeees 57 4 4 1 TS AMIN a Nea Filie aa NENE E EE A E 57 4 4 2 EATI a IN arses secs IA eee oa Gs na ba bo eons Ronan oa au naa E 57 Table Of Contents 4 4 3 NT cates ccc cca sc saserns ccna cc aceon hee se one nse EER 58 4 4 4 IG SH l C E E E pare ecest atienseephaawemasncereeorsartomnaaensees 59 4 5 MF UM AE 1 E E ns ew ena tn eine cence PE ea geo nce ee nce nd T men A aes 59 4 6 Searching and Navigating through Fuiles cccccccessssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 60 4 6 1 e 101601105 2 gt lt Cee nn E EE E en ne eee 60 4 6 2 Fading Text m Multiple FeSi E EETA AET E 60 4 6 3 Replacing To eenean E AE 61 4 6 4 Jumping to a Specified Line 0 ccccsccecceceeeeeccecceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeess 62 A MA OA ine E E EE EEE 62 Ao og 3101911 1S oN cee eee ne ee eee ee en ne er tee EE AEE ere eee ee 64 4 9 Configuring Text Lay Out saisissnjcassiosdean cssenvatestensdeesaieavaionwenvinenennveinntunviuesanaveaesvessiabeecetbienvensOensetaseees 64 4 9 1 g 1 ae a T ae an ee ee ee ene ee eer 64 4 9 2 TT TADS cascade ce cw esse cece tm cet mee 65 4 9 3 Auto NG CA OM sss saree neioacantec ofa sannntasen EE caneneeeeacncatar asian 65 AMOK SPVGG a W WING OV issie neii in i En EERE eE tan E nd 66 ANN Changing the Editor Font pic ccasct cess savccaseunsdestanesatangelenceasavataeaseuacdedsanssatasseeeaesnssaiaenageeneoeioacnetnagoes 67 al Aa 4 172
295. sssssssssssssrrreeeesssssssssssssrrreeeeessssssssssssrerreeeesessssssssssertteeeeeesessseee 7 1 2 6 Output window 0 cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseseeeeeeess 8 1 2 7 S D e A TEE A 8 1 3 Holp ays eDi eee ee ene EEEE E E E 9 1 4 Launching the HEW sesseessesessnnnnnnnnnnnnnrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrrerrrrrererrrrrererererrrreerereerrererereererrerereeeees 9 1 5 Creatim anew WOrKSPACE oiera oiin E EEE EEA 10 1 6 Opening a WOrKSPaCe cece cceccessssssssssssesessessseseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 1 7 Using old Workspaces 0cccccccsssssssssesesssseeseseesessseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 1 8 SaD Sere WOI PACE E EE 11 1 9 CIOSING amp E e E EOT 11 1 10 Exiting the HEW eeeeeeeesssessennnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrererrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrrerrrrrrrrrrerrerrrererrrreerererereererereeeerereens 11 Lil Component System Oy Cr view serisirieiieyriini ikisini EEEE AEE EET N Oni DERNE EREET 11 1 12 Debugger Sessions sesisirersnsisniinninrrueraisininiaisnanaainaiia aaan aaia AA anA AAA ANA aAA AN AAA AAAA AA EA RAAR EANA 12 Build basics occarosas iaaasisetodasae dae ide teeatias ee ai eaa ae e a aaa E aiiai 13 2 1 pan e Naa A OEE EE EI E E TE er A E E A E 13 22 Configuring the workspace window Projects tab ecccceccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 2 3 Project
296. st displays the same content as that seen in the workspace most recently used file list This list also appears on the file menu To open a workspace by specifying a workspace file HWS file select the Browse to another project workspace button and click the OK button To register or unregister a tool from the HEW click the Administration button Click the Cancel button to use the HEW without opening a workspace 2CENESAS 1 Overview 1 5 Creating a new workspace To create a new workspace l Note Select the Create a new project workspace option from the Welcome dialog box and click the OK button or select File gt New Workspace The New Project Workspace dialog box will be displayed Enter the name of the new workspace into the Workspace Name field This can be up to 32 characters in length and contain letters numbers and the underscore character Especially do not use a minus sign or a space As you enter the workspace name the HEW will add a sub directory and project name for you automatically This can be changed if desired This allows the workspace and project name to be different To select the directory in which you would like to create the workspace use the Browse button or type the directory into the Directory field manually Select the CPU family and Toolchain upon which you would like to base the workspace Note that these cannot be changed once the workspace has been created
297. start up symbol to drop down list box 15 3 15 Updating the Window Contents The Memory window contents can be forcibly updated Selecting the Refresh from the pop up menu of the memory window 15 3 16 Disabling Update of the Window Contents Automatic update of the Memory window contents which is performed when user program execution stops and in other cases can be disabled The Memory window will be grayed Selecting the Lock Refresh from the pop up menu of the memory window 15 3 17 Changing the Data Length Select the data length from the followings in the pop up menu Data Length of the memory window Either the following can be specified lbyte Display in 1 byte units default 2bytes Display in 2 bytes units 4bytes Display in 4 bytes units 8bytes Display in 8 bytes units 15 3 18 Changing the Radix Select the data radix from the followings in the pop up menu Radix of the memory window 181 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Either the following can be specified Hex Display in hexadecimal default Dec Display in decimal Signed Dec Display in signed decimal Oct Display in octal Bin Display in binary 15 3 19 Changing the Code Select the code from the followings in the pop up menu Code of the memory window Either the following can be specified ASCII Displaying memory as ASCII characters default SJIS JIS UNICODE EUC Not support Float Displaying memory as
298. t Click the OK buttons on both dialogs to complete the creation of the new build configuration Configuration name Based on configuration Debug 2 6 3 Removing a build configuration To remove a build configuration 1 Select the Build gt Build Configurations menu option to display the Build Configurations dialog 2 Select the build configuration to remove and click the Remove button Click the OK button to close the Build Configurations dialog 25 2CENESAS 2 Build basics 2 Building a project 2 7 1 Building individual files The High performance Embedded Workshop lets you build project files individually To build an individual file 1 Select the file to build from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Select one of the following operations e Click the Build File toolbar button OR e Select the Build lt file gt option from pop up menu OR e Select the Build gt Build File menu option OR e Press CTRL F7 All output is redirected to the Build tab of the Output window 2 7 2 Building a project The Build option only compiles or assembles those files that have changed since the last build Additionally it will rebuild source files if they depend upon a file that has changed since the last build For instance if the file TEST C include s the file HEADER H and the latter has changed since the last build the file TEST c will be recompiled To perform a
299. t Views menu option The Format Views dialog will be displayed Expand the Source view icon in the tree 2 Select the file type for which you want to create a new keyword group from the tree on this dialog Click the Add button underneath the tree The Add Category dialog will then be displayed Enter the name of the group into the Category Title field Click the OK button to add a keyword group To modify the name of the group select the keyword group and click the Modify button underneath the tree Modify Category dialog will then be displayed Enter the name of the group into the Category Title field To remove a keyword group from the tree select the keyword group and click the Remove button underneath the tree Add Category Ei Category Title pE Cancel _ Cacal 68 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor To create new keywords 1 Select the Setup gt Format Views menu option The Format Views dialog will be displayed 2 Select the desired keyword group to be modified and click the Keywords tab Color Font Keywords Comments break case catch p continue SEE 3 Click the Add button to add a keyword Then the Add Keyword dialog will be launched Specify a keyword in the Keyword field and click the OK button to close the dialog To remove a keyword from the Keywords list select the keyword and click the Remove button Add Keyword Z Cancel 4 Click the OK button Note On
300. t from the workspace 1 Select the Loaded project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Right click to display the pop up menu and select the Unload Project option Note It is possible to select multiple projects in the workspace window to perform these operations 33 2CENESAS 2 Build basics 2 12 Specifying dependencies between projects The projects within a workspace can be dependent upon one another so that when one project is built all its dependent projects are built first This is useful if one project uses another in the workspace For example imagine that a workspace contains two projects The first project is a library which is included by an application project In this case the library must have been built and up to date before the second application can build correctly To achieve this situation we can specify the library as a dependent 1 e child project of the application project This would then allow the library to be built first if it is out of date When a dependent project is built the HEW attempts to match the configuration in the dependent project with that of the current project This means that if the current configuration is Debug then the HEW will attempt to build the Debug configuration in the dependent project If this matched configuration does not exist then the HEW will use the configuration that was last used in the dependent project To make projects depend upon another 1 Sel
301. t the Build tab 2 Set the three check boxes in the Show group as follows e Command line controls whether the command line is shown as each tool is executed e Environment controls whether the environment is shown as each tool is executed e Initial directory controls whether the current directory is shown as each tool 1s executed org M Command line M hitial directory M Environment Mark out of date files 2 7 7 Displaying out of date files in the workspace window Files updated later than the file generated by the previous build i e out of date files are marked in the workspace window In the window below the file demo c is out of date When you click Build next time these files will be re built This is also displayed for dependent projects of the current project The view of these files is updated whenever something that affects the build occurs e g options changing file addition dependencies changing files modified etc 28 2CENESAS 2 Build basics lowly Lerc vecttblerc wo E vhandler src BS source tile a dbsete E demo c n E lowerc c E resetpre c shrkc TA Projects E Terplates al Mawigation 2 To display out of date files in the workspace window 1 Click on the Setup gt Options menu item 2 Select the Build tab 3 Check the Mark out of date files check box 4 Click OK Pow Command line Initial directory Environment 2 8 File dependen
302. t them into other workspaces This greatly reduces the amount of time it takes to configure the same version control settings across several workspaces To export a version control setup 1 Select the Tools Version Control Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed 2 Click the Export button A File Save dialog will be displayed Browse to the directory in which you would like to save the configuration 4 Enter the name of the file and then click the OK button To import a version control setup 1 Select the Tools Version Control Configure menu option The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed 2 Click the Import button A File Open dialog will be displayed Browse to the Hvc file that you would like to import 4 Select the file and then click the OK button 117 2CENESAS 8 Using the Custom Version Control System 118 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe 9 Using Visual SourceSafe The High performance Embedded Workshop provides specific support for the Visual SourceSafe version control system The Visual SourceSafe version control system associates a project in your workspace with a project inside a Visual SourceSafe database It allows you to quickly invoke the standard commands either by selecting an option from the Tools Version Control sub menu or by clicking a version control toolbar button 9 1 Attaching Visual SourceSafe to
303. te maketile for the current configuration in the currently active project Cancel all configurations in the currently active project all configurations in all loaded projects in the current workspace Makefile format HMake Use static sub command files M Scan dependencies whilst building make file The HEW will create a subdirectory called make within the current workspace directory and then generate the makefile into it It is named after the selection and has a MAK extension for example the current project and configuration e g PROJECT DEBUG MAK The executable HMAKE EXE located in the HEW installation directory is provided for you to execute the makefiles generated by the HEW It is not intended to execute makefiles that have been modified by the user For further details on HMAKE see Reference 12 HMAKE User Guide Note e Ifthe name of the HEW installation directory includes a space the GNU Make command will not work correctly when GNU Make is selected as the makefile format with the makefile generating function e When a makefile is generated with a sub command specified the HEW outputs the directory of sub command files as an absolute path If these sub command files are moved to another directory the make commands will not work correctly because the make commands cannot refer to the sub command files To execute a makefile 1 Open a DOS Command Prompt window and change to the mak
304. ter definition file 1odefine h written in the C language Generate Hardware Setup Selects generation of a model I O Function register initial setting program Generates a hardware setting file hwsetup c cpp or hwsetup src To include a main function that has already been made select None in Generate main Function and after making the project add the file containing the main function to the project Note that if the name of the function to be included is different the function calling section in resetprg c must be modified Be sure to refer to the hardware manual of the CPU for actual values of the sample file contents such as the vector table definition and I O register definition which are generated by the project generator To move to Step 4 click the Next gt button in Step 3 New Project 4 9 Setting the Standard Library wJnew Performs memory allocation and C etvoe h Handles and checks characte _Jmath h Performs numerical calculatio jmatht h Performs numerical calculati stdare h Supports access to variable Mstdio h Performs input output handlin Mlstdlib h Performs program standarc Mlstring h Performs string comparison jiosteC Performs input output pro joomplextEG Performs complex nu F Enable all Dizable all A Next gt Finish Cancel 4 Specify the configuration of the standard libraries used by the C C compiler in Step 4 149 sQENESAS 15
305. that the toolchain version of the created project matches the using environment When the registered toolchain can be updated the toolchain version can be changed in the dialog box that is displayed by selecting Tools gt Change Toolchain Version Change Toolchain ersion ea Toolchain name Renesas SuperH RISC Curent version 9 0 0 0 CPU Family SupeH RISC engine _ Cancel Toolchair Renesas Super RISC engine Sta Latannrationn Toolchain wersion lsoi0 i stst s s s s dri 3 0 0 0 Toolchain build phases EMRAT OptLinker SH Assembler r 00 01 SH C C Compiler 3 00 01 SH CtC Library Generator 87 2CENESAS 5 Tools Administration 88 2CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 6 Customizing the Environment 6 1 Customizing the toolbars The High performance Embedded Workshop provides standard toolbars as detailed in the Toolbars topic In addition to these you may also construct your own toolbars Toolbars Toolbars nmng W Show Tooltips Hew Reset w ersion Control Wel Default Window Wl Debug Aun iaulbar rane E ditor To create a new toolbar 1 Select the Setup gt Customize menu option The Setup Customize dialog will be displayed 2 Click the New button The New Toolbar dialog will be displayed 3 Enter the name of the new toolbar into the Toolbar Name field 4 Click the OK button to create the new toolbar Note
306. the build takes a set of project files and builds them if every file builds successfully then the next phase is executed IMPLI PHASE OW TPUT Real BUILD a COMPILER Ses C sek Files S E ASSEMBLER PROJECT a Ss Files a_i Library Files Files Load module In the example shown in the figure above the Compiler is the first phase the Assembler is the second phase and the Linker is the third and final phase During the Compiler phase the C C source files from the project are compiled in turn During the Assembler phase the assembler source files are assembled in turn During the Linker phase all library files and output files from the Compiler and Assembler phases are linked together to produce the load module 13 2CENESAS 2 Build basics The build process can be customized in several ways For instance you can add your own phases disable phases delete phases and so on These advanced build issues are left to chapter 3 Advanced build features 2 2 Configuring the workspace window Projects tab The Projects tab shows the current workspace projects and files You can quickly open any project file or dependent file by double clicking on its icon H Ta Project Workspace Project Active project 0 Assembly source file 5 ra source file Folder E dbscte Project file E lowere c n E resetpre c bee sbrk c fo FE SH4 Denmo c AS Download modules z 7 Gctive pr
307. the Environment 6 3 Using Custom Placeholders Throughout the High performance Embedded Workshop the user can use a number of pre defined placeholders for directory definitions For example the user can use the PROJDIR variable to signify the current HEW project directory This makes it much easier to relocate projects and keep all of the paths correct The High performance Embedded Workshop also has the ability to define custom placeholders This means you can enter your own custom placeholder definition and decide upon its directory value Once defined this placeholder becomes available throughout the rest of the HEW system The placeholders can be defined on an application wide level so the placeholders are available to all workspaces and projects that use the HEW The other method of defining the placeholders is using the workspace wide custom placeholders This means the placeholders can only be used in the current workspace This list is only available when you have a workspace open Placehoalders Application wide custom placeholders Placeholder Add Aodty maly Es relia Workspace wide custom placeholders Placeholder Add Madty ji Remove To add a custom placeholder 1 Choose the Setup gt Customize The Tools Customize dialog will be displayed Select the Placeholders tab 2 Choose whether you need to use an application wide or workspace wide placeholder Click the
308. the HEW application If a problem does occur that results in a application crash the HEW bug tracking program will be invoked automatically This allows you to compile a bug report and this can then be sent to your technical support contact in a variety of ways It is also possible to invoke this tracker program manually This is described below To create and send a HEW bug report 1 Select Help gt Technical support gt Create a HEW bug report 2 Detailed information is generated from your HEW system This may take some time The Submit a Bug Report dialog is then displayed 3 Itis possible to then add additional information concerning the exact issue you have found in the large edit box Please type a description of the problem you wish to report f 4 Once you are happy with your report you can choose the method of sending the report in the How would you like to submit the report drop list You can print it e mail it or save it to a disk How would you like to submit the report Print 5 Then click Submit This will send the report 227 2CENESAS 16 Technical Support 228 2CENESAS Reference Reference 229 2CENESAS Reference 230 2CENESAS 1 1 List of File Menu Menu File Menu Option New Open Close New Workspace Open Workspace Save Workspace Close Workspace New Session Import Session Save Session Save Session As Refresh Session Save Save All
309. the Previous Bookmark toolbar button kl OR e Press SHIFT F2 OR e Select the Edit gt Bookmarks Previous Bookmark menu option OR e Right click and select the Bookmarks Previous Bookmark menu option from the pop up menu To remove all bookmarks e Click the Clear All Bookmarks toolbar button Gh OR e Select the Edit Bookmarks Clear All Bookmarks menu option OR e Right click and select the Bookmarks Clear All Bookmarks menu option from the pop up menu 63 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor 4 8 Printing a File To print a file Ensure that the window whose contents you want to print is the active window Select one of the following operations e Click the Print toolbar button OR e Press CTRL P OR e Select the File Print menu option 4 9 Configuring Text Layout 4 9 1 Page Set up When you print a file from the HEW editor the settings in the print dialog affect the way the file is printed e g double or single sided Control over how the text is formatted on the page can also be controlled via the Page Setup option This allows you to specify the margins top bottom left and right of your printouts It is often necessary to set this because some printers cannot print to the edges of an A4 page Furthermore some users have their own layout requirements e g a large left hand margin so that code can be placed in an A4 binder To set up the page margins 1 Select the File gt Page Setup
310. the Window menu Menu Option Operation Window gt Cascade Arrange all open windows so that they overlap with the top left of each Editor window visible Window gt Tile Horizontally Arrange all open windows horizontally so that they occupy the entire Editor window without any overlaps Window gt Tile Vertically Arrange all open windows vertically so that they occupy the entire Editor window without any overlaps Window Arrange Icons Line up all minimized windows at the bottom of the Editor window Window Close All Close all open Editor windows 56 2CENESAS 4 Using the Editor The files within the editor can be displayed in a notebook style This means that each file has a separate tab associated with it to aid in navigating between files To show files in a notebook style M Show files in notebook 1 Select the Setup gt Options menu option The Options dialog will be displayed Select the Editor tab 2 Set the Show files in notebook checkbox as appropriate Click the OK button for the new settings to take effect 4 4 Standard File Operations 4 4 1 Creating a New File To create a new editing window e Click the New File toolbar button L OR e Press CTRL N OR e Select the File New menu option The new window will be given an arbitrary name by default You can provide a new name when you save the file 4 4 2 Saving a File To save the contents of an editing window 1 Ensu
311. the current project A project can be in three states the Current project a Loaded project or an Unloaded project Since a workspace can contain many projects only one of them can be the Current project at any time This project is the one that build actions and debug operations can be performed on e g clicking the Build toolbar button will build the Current project To set a project as the current project Select one of the following operations e Select the project that you want to make active from the Project Set Current Project sub menu OR e Select the project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window Right click to display the pop up menu and select the Set as Current Project option Note It is also possible to select which project you want to make Current from the Project Set Current Project sub menu If the project is Loaded it is possible to open the project s directory and view the files It 1s also possible to change the builder or debugger options for the project A Loaded project can also have tool executions performed on it from the Tools menu To load a project in the workspace 1 Select the Unloaded project from the Projects tab of the Workspace window 2 Right click to display the pop up menu and select the Load Project option If the project is Unloaded its icon appears grayed in the Projects tab of the Workspace window and no actions can be performed upon it To unload a projec
312. the options for targets and toolchain to be matched closely so that no inconsistencies occur If there is no toolchain installed you will only be able to select debug only project types By default HEW will display a debug only project generation type for each CPU family in the New Workspace dialog This project type will provide similar behaviour to the previous HEW session dialog box New Project Workspace Projects Project type Workspace Name Demonstration Tutoria Cy mae AppurataN Project Name Import Makefile Ro Library Directory CMH Eww Tutorial Browse GFU family SuperH RISC engine Tool chair Renesas Super Standard Properties Cancel The New Workspace dialog allows you to select a project type for generation which matches your CPU target Project Type Description Application Project for generating an execution program that includes the initial routine file written in the C C language Assembly Application Project for generating an execution program that includes the initial routine file written in the assembly language Demonstration Project for generating a demonstration program written in the C language Empty Application Project for only setting the toolchain environment no generation file Import Makefile A project to create an executable program by importing an existing makefile Library Project for generating a library file no gene
313. tion on double click is unchecked Double click a navigation item on the Navigation tab e Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu Select Jump to declaration To list the member variables and functions in the alphabetical order 1 Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu 2 Uncheck Group by access This option is unchecked at default To group the display of public private and protected member variables and functions together 1 Right click on navigation items on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu 2 Check Group by access Another useful facility is the capability of viewing the base or derived classes for a certain selection To view the Base or derived classes 1 Right click on class on the Navigation tab to display a pop up menu 2 To see the derived classes for the selection click the Show Derived Classes menu item To see the base classes for the selection click the Show Base Classes menu item 3 Depending on the selection a dialog is displayed which shows the class structure selected in an expanded tree format 4 Click Close to close this dialog once you have the information you require 136 2CENESAS 13 Map 13 Map The High performance Embedded Workshop has a functionality to graphically display the map information of each map type Map types that can be displayed depend on whether the toolchain is used
314. tmost menu on the High performance Embedded Workshop menu bar It contains the Contents menu option which when selected takes you to the main High performance Embedded Workshop help window To obtain help on specific dialogs click the context sensitive help button which 1s located in the top right hand corner of each dialog as shown in the figure below Contesxt Sensittve Help Buton BEZ Close Button When this is clicked the mouse pointer will change to a pointer with a question mark above it Whilst the mouse pointer is in this state click on the part of the dialog that you require assistance on Alternatively select the control for which you require help and press the F1 key 1 4 Launching the HEW To initiate the HEW open the Start menu of Windows select Programs select Renesas select High performance Embedded Workshop and then select the shortcut of the HEW The Welcome dialog box shown will be displayed by default Welcome 7 Options OK Cancel C Open a recent project workspace Administration iet CAH E Ww SH demors H 4demo hws C Browse to another project workspace To create a new workspace select the Create a new project workspace button and click the OK button To open one of the recent project workspaces select the Open a recent project workspace button select a workspace from the drop down list and click the OK button The Recent project workspace li
315. to which controlled directories i e where the source files are stored in the version control system Mappings between these two directory systems can be specified via the Projects tab of the Version Control Setup dialog Projects show detaile for project Project Details Version control directory mappines Add Cork Applications Projecti oo cchwe su Vapp projectl C work Application sore WNC LS Lapp ere hodit D wark ohared wesw hared Environment Modit i Remove 2CENESAS 112 8 Using the Custom Version Control System To define a new directory mapping Select Tools Version Control Configure The Version Control Setup dialog will be l displayed Select the Projects tab 2 Click the Add button which is next to the Version Control Directory Mappings list The Version Control Directory Mapping dialog will be displayed 3 Enter the source directory i e working directory into the Source Directory field or browse to it graphically by clicking the Browse button 4 Enter the version control directory 1 e controlled directory into the Version Control Directory field 5 Click the OK button to define the new mapping To modify a directory mapping l Select Tools Version Control gt Configure The Version Control Setup dialog will be displayed Select the Projects tab Select the mapping to be modified from the V
316. tomatic with regard to an application generator as it is the output from the linker Debug Settings ed SimSessionSH 4 Target Options ee Gs SH4dema Default Debug Format El D wart Download Modules Offset Address Add CONFIGDIR SEIPAO QOOOO000 El D warts Modit Hemose M Paw Cancel It is also possible to manually choose download modules after the project creation This is achieved via the Debug Settings dialog This dialog allows you to control the debug settings throughout your workspace The tree on the left of the dialog contains all of the current projects Selecting a project in this tree will then show you the settings for that project and the configuration selection in the Configuration drop down list In this list box it is possible to select multiple configurations or all configurations If you select multiple configurations you can choose to modify the settings for one or more configurations at once The Debug Settings dialog displays the following debug options i e Current debug target for the current project and configuration selection e Download modules for the current project and configuration selection 159 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger The download module list displays the order in which the files will be downloaded to the target It is possible to Add Remove Modify Up and Down modules in this list To add a new download module
317. ton to launch a standard Save As dialog The access size for saving data can be selected from the Access size drop down list When the data is saved in memory with little endian the order of data depends on the access size When the file save is complete a confirmation message box will be displayed 183 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 3 24 Loading a Memory Area from a File A file can be loaded to the debugging platform s memory Choose Load from the pop up menu of the memory window The Load Program dialog box is displayed c_i File name Lancel Po Offset address fooooo0cd fal ACCESS size fi T Perform memory verify during download Enter the file format in Format file name in File name offset address in Offset address and access size in Access size To verify memory check Perform memory verify during download 15 3 25 Splitting Up the Window Display To vertically divide the Memory window display into two select Split from the pop up menu and move the split up bar 15 3 26 Verifying a Memory Area A memory area in the address space can be verified using the memory verify function Choose the Debug gt Verify Memory option The Verify Memory dialog box is displayed Yernty Memory ea File name PO Offset address 2 AcCess SIZE i al Enter the file format in Format file name in File name offset address in Offset address and access size in
318. top in the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be automatically updated when user program execution stops Checking Auto Refresh gt Realtime in the pop up menu will allow the window contents to be real time updated 15 4 3 Updating the Window Contents Selecting Refresh Now from the pop up menu immediately updates the window contents 187 CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 4 4 Displaying the Pixel Information Double clicking within the window displays information on the pixel on which the mouse pointer is located in the Pixel Information dialog box Pixel Information Ei Color mode Monochrome Pinel Black Position ss 106 t 54 Buffer Size width UU Height a0 Image Size Width oi Height B00 This dialog box displays pixel information on the cursor location Color Mode Pixel Position Buffer Size Image Size Displays the format of the image Displays color information of the cursor location Displayed in decimal Displays the cursor location in X and Y axis Displayed in decimal X Displays the X axis of the cursor location Y Displays the Y axis of the cursor location Displays the buffer size Displayed in decimal Width Displays the buffer width Height Displays the buffer height Displays the width and height of the display Displayed in decimal Width Displays the width Height Displays the height 15 5 Displaying memory contents as wa
319. ts program Displays help for Command Line or help on a command Initializes the debugging platform system Controls command output logging Compares memory contents Displays memory contents Modifies memory contents Fills a block of memory Finds a string in an area of memory Moves a block of memory Tests a block of memory Opens the specified workspace file Exits HEW Sets default input radix Removes a file from the current project Resets the microprocessor Saves the current session Saves the current workspace Delays command execution Steps through program by instructions or source lines Sets the step mode Steps out of the current function Steps through program without stepping into functions Sets rate of stepping Executes a file of commands 239 2CENESAS 2 List of Commands TCL TOOL_INFROMATION TO UPDATE ALL DEPENDENCIES UD Turns TCL commands on or off Outputs the tool information Updates the current projects build dependencies 1 Available only when there is a toolchain installed 2 Support for this command depends on the debugging platform For the syntax of each command refer to the online help 240 2CENESAS 2 List of Commands 2 2 Command List Listed as the Functions HEW Application Control Commands Command Name Short Name ADD FILE AF CHANGE CONFIGURATION CC CHANGE PROJECT CP CHANGE SESSION CS CLOSE WORKSPACE CW EVALUATE EV OPEN WORKSPACE OW QUIT QU RADIX RA RE
320. u and select the phase whose options you would like to modify 2 A dialog will be displayed allowing you to specify the options 3 After making your selections click the OK button to set them To obtain further information use the context sensitive help button or select the area in which you need assistance and press F1 2 6 Build configurations The HEW allows you to store all of your build options into a build configuration i e you can freeze all of the options and give them a name Later on if you select that configuration all options for all of the build phases will be restored These configurations also allow the user to specify debugger settings for a build configuration This means that each configuration can be targeted at a different end platform The figure below shows three configurations Default MyDebug and MyOptimized In the first configuration Default each phase compile and assemble is set to its standard settings In the second configuration MyDebug each file is being built with debug information switched on In the third configuration MyOptimized each file is being built with optimization on full and without any debug information The developer of this project can select any of those configurations and build them without having to return to the options dialogs to set them again Default Thy Deb ug Thy Optimized Conf gurati ori Configurator Configurator Debug OH Debug OH Deb ug OHF
321. u to see what functions are available for the current object Selecting the function automatically enters the remaining parameters for you class Sample tp sam Posam new Samples p sam gt change l fort i503 yok ehengeWone a j f if lt 0 J 7j ali j 4 18 Evaluate an Expression Launches the Evaluate dialog box allowing the user to enter a numeric expression e g 205 2 and display the result in all currently supported radices To evaluate an expressions l Zi 3 Select the Edit gt Evaluate menu option Launches the Evaluate dialog box Enter the expression that you wish to evaluate and click the Evaluate button Provides a calculator function evaluating simple and complex expressions with parentheses and symbols All operators have the same precedence but parentheses may be used to change the order of evaluation The operators have the same meaning as in C C Expressions can also be used in any command where a number is required The result is displayed in all supported radix types Valid operators Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Logical AND amp amp Logical OR Logical NOT Equal to sa 1 1 Bitwise AND amp Bitwise OR Bitwise NOT Unequal to Left arithmetic shift lt lt Right arithmetic shift gt gt Less than lt Greater than gt Modulo Bitwise exclusive OR N Less than or equal to lt Greater
322. ugger sessions The HEW stores all of your builder options into a configuration In a similar way the HEW stores your debugger options in a session The debugging platforms the programs to be downloaded and each debugging platform s options can be stored in a session Sessions are not directly related to a configuration This means that multiple sessions can share the same download module and avoid unnecessary code rebuilds Each session s data should be stored in a separate file in the HEW project See section 2 6 Build configurations for more information about a configuration See section 15 1 5 Debugger sessions for more information about a Debugger sessions 12 2CENESAS 2 Build basics 2 Build basics The HEW Builder is a Graphical User Interface designed to ease the development and building of applications written in C C and assembly language for Renesas microcomputers Key Features e Intuitive interface e On line help e Common Look amp Feel Notes e For detailed information about debugging platform hardware please refer to the separate target debugging manual 2 1 The build process The typical build process is outlined in the figure below This may not be the exact build process that your installation of HEW will use as it depends upon the tools that were provided with your installation of HEW you may not have a compiler for instance In any case the principles are the same each phase of
323. ursor position Map Toolbar ae 2 E g Physical Memon Linker Linker memor map o feSOUICe map list section setting o0o000000 o0002000 ik esetPAG C O0004000 CeRSEC CHDOSEC OO006000 D o0o008000 00004000 oOooCO00 OOO0E OOO OOOOFFFF E On Chip ROM DO Allocated Area E On Chip RAM LIE sternal LI Nor use i o Reserve Le Guide Graphical map information of each map type e To display other addresses Click on the guide Option Clicking the right hand mouse button displays a pop up menu containing available options A basic operation is allocated to the toolbar The functions of Toolbar display and Customize toolbar are also included in the pop up menu displayed by right clicking the toolbar area Pop up menu options Toolbar bottom Function Move Cursor me Changing the cursor position Zoom In yet Zooming in the display Zoom Out Setting back to the previous display Zoom Properties En Changing the zoom mode Properties Changing the map type being displayed Toolbar display Showing hiding toolbar buttons Customize toolbar Customizing toolbar buttons 138 2CENESAS 13 Map 13 2 Changing the cursor position 1 Select Move Cursor from the pop up menu 2 The Move Cursor dialog box is displayed 3 Select an item for display The first address of the selected item is displayed in Address 4 Click the OK button Move Cursor 7 Address ooooo000 bern Phy
324. used to show were a tab character must be used in order to keep the make file syntactically correct Variable declarations A variable declaration declares a variable which can then be used in any statement throughout the rest of the hmake file A declaration has the following syntax lt variable name gt lt value gt 263 2CENESAS 12 HMAKE User Guide Any number of white space characters are allowed between the variable name and the sign and the value and the sign The value may be split over several lines using a character If the value contains V characters within the main text then these are taken literally Only V characters followed by a new line are considered to indicate a value wrapping over more than one line There follows some examples of valid variable declarations EXECUTABLE c dir prog exe OUTPUT c dir2 file1 out INPUT c dir2 file1 c DEPEND c dir2 file2 h c dir2 file3 h c dir2 file4 h In order to use a variable later in the hmake file write the variable name with added to the front and added to the back The variable name along with the characters will be substituted with the variables value For examples of this see later under description blocks Only alphanumeric characters and underscore characters are allowed in variable names It is possible to use a variable inside the declaration of a different variable but all variables must be declare
325. ve location after the relocation procedure This is especially useful if you are using a project shared between more than one workspace In older versions of HEW this project would not have been relocated and would have still tried to access the original file path The older version of HEW could only relocate the projects which were in a sub directory of the workspace directory This is still the standard behavior for the High performance Embedded Workshop To add the project to the workspace using a relative path 1 Select the project in the workspace window 2 Right click and then select Properties 3 Click the Project relative file path checkbox to switch the relative file path feature 4 Click OK I Project relative file path 2 15 User folders in the workspace In the High performance Embedded Workshop it is possible to add folders to your workspace window This allows you to logically group your files into certain areas within a project The folder can be set to any name and this is entered in a dialog To add a user folder 1 Select the project on the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click and then add folder 3 Enter the name and click OK 4 You can now drag and drop files into this folder to group them logically To remove a user folder 1 Select the folder on the Projects tab of the workspace window 2 Right click and then select Remove folder Note that the folder must be empty and that
326. vect IFC Definition of Vector env Inc Define Interruput Event Ree vHandler arc Reset hterrupt Handler resetpre c Reset Program Tutorial C Main Program sbrk hi Header file of sbrk file h petting of Stack area Flees Finish Cancel Description Description of the file Clicking the Finish button in Step 9 displays the Summary dialog box 154 sQENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Summary Ei Project Summary PROJECT GENERATOR PROJECT MAME Tutorial PROJECT DIRECTOR CAHE Tutorial Tutorial CPU SERIES SH 4 LPU TYPE SH 750 TOOLCHAIN NAME Renesas SuperH RISC engine St TOOLCHAIN VERSION 9 0 1 0 GENERATION FILES CHEWS Tutorial Tutorialydbsct c Setting of B A Section CAHEWA Tutorial Tutorial sbrk c Program of brk LC NHEWW4 s Tutorial Tutorialviodetine A Definition of 10 Register CAHE Tutorial Tuborialhintong src Interrupt Program CAHE W Tutorial Tutorial vecttbl sre Initialize of YWector Table r H J Generate Readme tst as a summary file in the project directory Cancel Click OF to generate the project or Cancel to abort 10 The project generator displays information on the project to be generated in the Summary dialog box After confirming the display contents click the OK button Clicking Cancel returns to the New Project wizard dialog box Checking Generate Readme txt as a summary file in the project dire
327. veforms Memory contents can be displayed as wave forms in the Waveform View window 15 5 1 Opening the Waveform View Window Choose View gt Graphic gt Waveform or click the Wave form toolbar button to open the Waveform Properties dialog box 188 Waveform Properties Data Size Ebit Cancel Channel i bono Stereo Buffer SizetHexs O0000000 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger Specifies the waveform format The following items can be specified Data Address Data Size Channel Buffer Size Specifies the start address of data in memory Displayed in hexadecimal Selects 8Bit or 16Bit Specifies Mono or Stereo Specifies the buffer size of data Displayed in hexadecimal After the settings have been made in the Waveform Properties dialog box clicking the OK button opens the Waveform View window Even after the Waveform View window is displayed the display contents can be modified by opening this dialog box by choosing Properties from the pop up menu Displays the memory contents as waveforms The X axis shows the number of sampling data and the Y axis Shows the sampling value Option Clicking the right hand mouse button displays a pop up menu containing available options Pop up menu options Auto Refresh Refresh Now Zoom In Zoom Out Reset Zoom Zoom Magnification Scale Clear Cursor Sample Information Properties Nonre
328. w colouring Format Wiews All views a Font f seen Selected Text Text SOURCE Fant Command Line ci Stack Trace Courier New ID Point Size Register ho o TOL Toolkit otatus Difference Memory Outout a Modify Remove Cancel HEW Sample Text 102 CENESAS 6 Customizing the Environment 6 11 Using the virtual desktop HEW has implemented the concept of the virtual desktop This allows window configurations to be defined that can be switched with the click of a button When a particular button is clicked the windows are hidden or displayed depending on the current settings of that window configuration It is possible to have a maximum of 4 desktop configurations in use When the session is saved the window positions for each configuration are saved to the session file You can then switch simply between each configuration to gain access to the other windows The toolbars and windows are dependent on the virtual desktop configuration Source files are independent of the virtual desktop system and will remain in view To rename your configuration to a more meaningful name 1 Click the Window gt Virtual Desktop menu item Select is cascaded menu 2 Select the Desktop Manager dialog 3 Select the window configuration you wish to change the name for 4 Click rename Enter the new meaningful name in the edit field and click OK 5 Click OK to keep the changes and revert to the HEW main window To sw
329. when YCbCr 1s selected Specifies the area to store data size and the address of the palette Data Address Palette Address Width He ight Size Specifies the start address of the memory where image data is to be displayed Displayed in hexadecimal Specifies the start address of the memory of color palette data Displayed in hexadecimal Valid when 8Bit is selected for RGB or BGR Specifies the width and height of the image Width Specifies the width of the image When a prefix is Pixel omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Height Specifies the height of the image When a prefix is Pixel omitted the values are input and displayed in decimal Buffer Size Displays the buffer size of the image from the width and height Displayed in hexadecimal Specifies the location size and data start location of the part to be displayed among the entire image View Mode Start Position Position Width Height Size Specifies the entire part to be displayed in the image Full Size Displays the entire image Part Size Displays part of the image Top Displays data from the upper left Bottom Displays data from the lower left Specifies the start position of the image where part of the image is to be displayed Valid when Part Size is selected X Position Specifies the X axis of the start location When a prefix is omitted the values are input and displayed
330. wnload Modules menu item This is a cascading menu item which allows a single module or all of the modules to be downloaded This can also be achieved by right clicking on modules under the Download Modules folder in the Workspace window 7 Unloading of Modules It is possible to manually unload downloaded modules in the list whenever you want from the Debug gt Unload Modules menu item This can also be done from the Download Module pop up menu in the Workspace window When a module is unloaded its symbols are erased from the HEW debugging system but the memory contents of the target remains unmodified After a module has been unloaded it cannot be debugged unless it is reloaded 8 Setting the Option of Debug Settings The HEW debugger is tightly integrated with the TCL command line facilities This means that it is possible to write batch files for the HEW debugger which can be executed automatically at certain times To configure the automatic command line batch file execution 1 Select the Debug gt Debug Settings menu item 2 Select the Options page 3 Select the Command batch file load timing This can be the following values at target connection before downloading the modules and after downloading the modules Command batch file load timing At target connection Before download of modules After download of modules dd Remove Up Down Then click Add The debugg
331. would rather display the output in the Version Control tab of the Output window 123 2CENESAS 9 Using Visual SourceSafe 124 2CENESAS 10 Network Facilities 10 Network Facilities The High performance Embedded Workshop is capable of sharing workspaces and projects across a network This allows users to concurrently work on shared projects and see each other s changes as they happen This system can be used in conjunction with version control The major difference with using this system is that each user can modify and update the workspace and project without making all of the other users reload their project and potentially lose all their changes This system 1s implemented by making one of the machines attached to the network the server machine All other client machines then use the service this machine is providing So if one of the client machines adds a new file the server machine is notified The server then notifies all other clients the action has taken place This procedure is shown below Networked workspace and project Eg Networked Data Example Network Networked Data Example access H Debug H SimDebug 5H 2 Server Network access All files are under the network service s control These include the workspace project session and source files Clients do not access data directly with the workspace and project files onthe network The clients cannot directly communicate with each other ether All
332. xed 16 Displaying memory as 16 bit fixed 32bit Fixed 32 Displaying memory as 32 bit fixed 24bit Accum Displaying memory as 24 bit accumulate 40bit Accum Displaying memory as 40 bit accumulate Layout Label Switch display or non display of Label area Register Switch display or non display of Register area Code l Switch display or non display of Code area Column Changing the number of digits displayed Coverage 1 Enable Switching display or non display of measurement result Save Saving memory contents in a file Load pe Loading a memory area from a file Split Saving an area of memory Toolbar display Showing hiding toolbar buttons Customize toolbar Customizing toolbar buttons 1 Support for this function depends on the debugging platform 174 2CENESAS 15 Using the Debugger 15 3 2 Modifying the Memory Contents To change the contents of memory follow the procedure below 1 In place edit in the data display area code display area 2 3 Data display area Code display area 2 To change the contents of memory open the Set dialog by selecting one of the following operations e Double click the data display area code display area you want to change OR e Select the data you want to change and choose the Set option from the pop up menu Address 00000000 Data m Data Type i Value C String Length li byte NF Werity Cancel Enter the value value
333. y Simulator the available menus are the System and Memory resource These options both allow the simulator to be customized and setup to your requirements You will be presented with a set up dialog specific to the debugging platform that you chose in the Debug Settings dialog Note For a detailed description of the features available in your debugging platform please refer to the separate Debugging Platform User Manual 2 Memory mapping For the debugger to correctly represent your user system the memory map must be set up It needs to know which areas in the device s address space are RAM ROM on chip registers or areas where there is no memory When you select the device type and mode in the project generator the HEW will automatically set up the map for that device and the mode in which the processor is operating For example in a device with internal ROM and RAM the areas where these are located in the device s memory map will be set by default If you are using a device that does not have internal memory or a device with external memory instead of or in addition to the internal memory then you must tell the debugging platform that you have memory there Tip If you are trying to debug code with an emulator and need some memory available that does not exist either on chip or externally in your hardware then you can map some emulation memory from the emulator to the address space for your application to use
334. z char rom 3 H 2 C source file char rom e atatic const struct 4 Editor x Connected Output window E Other component window e g Di ie AHI Build Debug Status bar Ready pex Default desktop Read write 1725 2 1 2 1 Title bar The title bar displays the name of current activate project and file It also contains the standard Minimize Maximize and Close buttons Click the Minimize button to minimize the HEW on the Windows task bar Click the Maximize button to force HEW to fill the screen Click the Close button to close the HEW this has the same effect as selecting the File Exit menu option or pressing ALT F4 1 2 2 Menu bar The menu bar initially contains ten menus File Edit View Project Build Debug Setup Tools Window and Help All of the menu options are grouped logically under these headings For instance if you want to open a file then the File menu is where you will find the right menu option if you want to set up a tool then the Tools menu is the correct selection File Edit View Project Build Debug Setup Tool Window Help 1 2 3 Toolbars The toolbars provide a shortcut to the options that you will use the most often There are ten default toolbars Editor Standard Default Window Search Bookmarks Templates Debug Debug Run Map and Version Control as shown in the figures below In the initial display of the default session buttons for versi

High-performance Embedded Workshop V.4.00 USER`S MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents